JP2018175911A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.SOLUTION: Ball entrance means is disposed at a position where a game ball flowed down through a first flow channel can enter, and on the basis of an entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance means, a specific privilege becoming advantageous to a player is granted by prescribed privilege granting means. Flow channel distribution means can be changed between a first distribution state where a game ball flowed into a specific flow channel is likely to be distributed to the first flow channel, and a second distribution state where the game ball is more likely to be distributed to a second flow channel than in the first distribution state. A state of the flow channel distribution means can be changed at least to the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a game state by setting means. Accordingly, even if the player shoots a game ball toward the specific flow channel, a privilege to be granted according to the game state can be made different so as to achieve an effect of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a particular winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of award balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of award balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a game from becoming monotonous.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming ball having flowed down the first flow path, and a specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path in which game balls can flow down. Based on the ball entering means provided at the position where the ball can enter and the game ball falling into the ball entering means, compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path Compared with the first distribution state in which specific benefit giving means for giving an advantageous specific benefit, and the first distribution state in which gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the first distribution state And a second distribution state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and a state of the channel distribution means at least in the first distribution state according to the game state. And setting means settable in the second distribution state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a normal ball entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the normal ball entry means And a game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering, and the specific benefit giving means gives a game value more than the predetermined game value as the specific benefit. It is

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition and the lottery result by the lottery means become a specific lottery result Game state setting means for setting the game state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player based on the game state setting means, and the setting means is set based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. The state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The specific benefit which is advantageous to the player in comparison with the above is given by the predetermined benefit giving means. The first distribution state in which the game balls having flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is varied by the setting means into at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, the game ball flows into the specific flow path, whereby a specific benefit is easily provided, and the game set to the second distribution state In the state, it becomes difficult to be granted a specific benefit. Therefore, even if the player strikes the game ball toward the specific flow path, since the benefits provided can be made different according to the game state, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined game value giving means is provided based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A gaming value is given. The specified benefit giving means gives a game value more than a predetermined game value as a specified benefit.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the gaming state set in the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. As a result, since the game value to be provided can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, in addition to becoming advantageous to the player by the bonus gaming state, more gaming value is awarded by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path It becomes easy to be done. Thus, the bonus game state can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where right-handed navigation was displayed, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where the right-handed warning image was displayed. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in the middle of a big hit, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when a ball entered into a large value winning opening during big hit. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen where the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus, when the storage valve is closed, (b) flowed into the storage apparatus, when the storage valve was open | released It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a ball | bowl. It is a figure which shows an upstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the routes provided in the right side of the game board. (A) is a figure which shows the state in which the 1st specification winning a prize mouth was opened, and (b) is a figure showing the state in which the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 1st specific winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure showing the path of the ball in the state where the 1st specification winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure showing a course of a ball in the state where the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure showing a course of a ball in the state where the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered the inside of a 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state in which the probability change ball opening is closed, (b) is a probability change ball opening being opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which entered into the inside of a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in a state. (A) is a figure which shows time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening in the 12th round of jackpot A, and the state of the flow path in the 2nd variable winning prize device, (b) is 12 of jackpot B It is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the round, and the state of the channel in the 2nd variable prize-winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a regular symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning command setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error information processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit | notification alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process at the time of normal performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in, when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) is a display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is opened. FIG. It is a front view of the storage apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into a storage apparatus in the case where the storage valve in a 2nd embodiment is closed is guided to a high value winning opening, (b) is a It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus in the case where the storage valve in 2 embodiment is closed is induced | guided | derived to a low value winning opening. When the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open | released, it is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the prescription content of the 1st contact classification selection table in a 2nd embodiment, (b) is a block diagram showing the electric composition of RAM in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of cancellation | release performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen in the jackpot in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the storage apparatus in the state which the slide member of the modification of 1st Embodiment protruded in the front view near side, and (b) is a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a top view of the storage apparatus and the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in the state where the slide member of an example was buried by the front view back side. It is a figure which shows the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize mouth closing processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error alerting | reporting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing 2 of hits performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state which the ball | bowl stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became a disadvantage arrangement | positioning for a player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state which the ball | bowl stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became arrangement | positioning advantageous for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | release suggestion display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, showing a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (movable member 310). Rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first entrance 64, second entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, ordinary entrance (not shown) Through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, storage device 600 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display unit 80, and the storage device 600 are processed by the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the through hole formed in, and is fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed in response to the winning of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the ordinary ball entry port 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal design (the 2nd design) is done. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the ball to the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as “lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the row for entering the ball to the second ball entry 640 The lottery of special symbols to be played is referred to as the "special symbol 2 lottery".

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a, which is normally closed at the same time, continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) Alternatively, the operation of opening the ball 10 times is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won), 12 In the round, the second specified winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (e.g., until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, and therefore, a greater amount of winning balls are paid out than in the normal time.

  Also, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probably variable ball entrance 654, and normal ball entry for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot awarded after the end of the special game state A mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the probability changing ball opening 654 in the special game state, a "special symbol high probability state" is given as an added value after the big hit ends. On the other hand, when the ball has not entered the definite change ball entrance 654 even during the special game state, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is given as the added value after the big hit end. In addition, as a jackpot type of a special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided (refer FIG.18 (b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a is different depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probability variation ball entrance 654 is varied.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls reserved for the first entrance 64 (number of balls reserved for special symbol 1), or the number of balls reserved for the second entrance 640 (specially selected) If the number of balls held for symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the holding balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary ball entry port 67, it is determined whether the regular symbol is hit or not. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be easy. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol is facilitated.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  When it becomes "big hit A", and "big hit B", it becomes special game state (15 R big hit) of the number of rounds of 15 rounds. In addition, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability change ball entrance 654, as the added value after the big hit end, while the big hit is finished until the next big hit of the pachinko machine 10 is high of the special symbol Move to the probability state (due to special symbol oddity). On the other hand, if the ball has not entered the definite game entrance ball slot 654 at least once in the special gaming state, as an added value after the big hit ends, the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times after the big hit end While, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the big hit end, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol together. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although details will be described later, in "big hit B", compared to "big hit A", it becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance 654 in the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, since "big hit B" is more likely to shift to a special symbol in a definite variation state after the big hit, it is likely to be a big hit again at a short interval after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift. In the high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the definite variation of the special symbol), the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640 is included. . On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the special symbol is not in a certain variation, and the jackpot probability is a normal condition, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol. In addition, the time saving state (during time) of the normal symbol refers to a gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640 because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game which is neither a special symbol oddity nor an ordinary symbol time-short (a jackpot probability or a normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is also not increased).

  During special symbols or during regular symbol shorting, not only is the probability of hitting the symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A long time is set in comparison with. When the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 as compared to the case where the motorized role 640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time shortening of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time thereof The number of times of opening the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be configured to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) does not change during the time variation of the special symbol or the time symbol of the normal symbol, and the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the opening times of the motorized accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the special symbol odd variation or the normal symbol time change, the ordinary symbol ( Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be up compared to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when a definite variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, although the definite variation state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot, it is not limited thereto. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, after the end of the special game state until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times is given a probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and after the lottery of the special symbol is ended 10 times May be set to be in the normal state. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is in a definite variation state is not limited to 10 times, and may be determined arbitrarily. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability changing ball opening 654 in the special gaming state, it is configured to be in the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times. However, the time period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be determined arbitrarily.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed. To display the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as the stop symbol after the end of the variation, or the ball entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance The number of balls is held for a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 9 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, upper, middle and lower Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the liquid crystal display.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-7, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the main number to which any one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is added A variable display in which the symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of balls held as the number of balls (parking balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character An announcement effect is performed by making it appear.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of ball arrivals is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held. In addition, FIG.4 (b) is an example in case the number of holding balls corresponding to the ball-in to the 1st entrance 64 is four balls. When the holding ball corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640 is generated, the holding ball number pattern of the aspect different from the holding ball number pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed Be done. As a result, the player can easily determine the number of holding balls corresponding to the first ball entry 64 and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second ball 640. It can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5 (a), a display (right-handed navi) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to strike a path on the right side (flow path) of the game board 13 is made. The display content when it occurs will be described.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric symbol 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball to the right of the game board 13 is released. The ball can be made easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting (right hitting). Moreover, although it mentions later for details, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is easy to become "big hit B" compared with the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol performed based on the ball entering the ball (lottery of special symbol 1). Therefore, in the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player by executing the right hitting. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a definite pattern or the normal symbol is set to a short time, the ball can not enter the second ball entry port 640 unless the player strikes the right, so the special is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol variation state or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol, the player is in the definite variation state of the special symbol by displaying the image (right-handed navi) illustrated in FIG. And it is structured to be able to obtain the benefit by becoming a time saving state of a normal symbol surely.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5 (a), in the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed for the small area Ds3 in the sub display area Ds, and the character is directed to the right above and below Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely obtain the benefit from the definite variation state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5B, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Although the warning image illustrated in FIG. 5 (b) is not a period in which the player should strike the ball (pass to the right) to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13, the right strike It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that it is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player has made a right-handed strike in the normal state (in a state where neither special symbol oddity nor ordinary symbol short time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the motorized accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily released in the normal state (the ball is unlikely to enter the second ball entry port 640 even if the right strike is performed). For this reason, if the player strikes the right in the normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery will be reduced as compared to the case of striking the ball at the first entrance 64 by striking the left. That is, when the player strikes the right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting a left-handed hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is hitting the right in the normal state, "warning" is performed on the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "Let's play with left strike!" Are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made to notice that he should not hit the right (should hit the left). Also, by checking the presence of a right strike warning screen (see FIG. 5 (b)), the store clerk in the hall also sees if there is a player who is performing an unusual game method that strikes the right in the normal state. It can be easily determined.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not right strike is performed, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) to which the ball can flow when right strike is performed. . More specifically, when the ball enters either of the general winning openings 601, 602 provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) or the out openings 603a to 603c (in each ball entry opening When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball entry switch provided, it is determined that the player has made a right strike.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and flows the ball to the general winning opening 602 according to the gaming state. It is set to two types of states with the state (refer FIG.9 (b)) which is easy to be made to carry out. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (a special symbol oddity state, a normal symbol short time state, a normal state), the ball is set to be easy to flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening (for example, three) where the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the ball is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602. For this reason, even if the right strike is performed in the normal state, there is little merit for the ball to enter the storage device 600 (the ball can not be increased). That is, when the right strike is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases and the holding balls also decrease, so that the disadvantage for the player is increased. For this reason, in order to prevent the player from continuing to carry out the game method disadvantageous to him (the game method in which the player strikes the right in the normal state), the right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed. Is configured as.

  It should be noted that, as a factor to determine whether or not to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only entering a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in a normal state, but also winning It is also determined whether or not the player has entered the difficult-to-play general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 etc. because the possibility of illegal gaming is taken into consideration. That is, in the normal state, by continuing to enter the ball illegally into the general winning opening (for example, 15 payouts) with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts), without passing through the jackpot There is a possibility that the illegal gaming method to obtain a large number of winning balls may be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (entered the ball) to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit on the left (right A right strike warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) prompting to not strike is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress unauthorized gaming.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the ball entrances (general winning ports 601, 602, out ports 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state In addition, although the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with many winning balls to be paid out, the illegal game is It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that it is being performed. As a result, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of the fraud only by confirming the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. In addition, if it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the hole computer is being tampered with. May be configured to output a signal indicating. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine the presence or absence of the possibility that the fraud is being performed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud is being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player strikes the right based on detection of ball entry into each ball entry port (general winning port 601, 602, out port 603a-603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that it is performed, the method for determining whether or not right strike is performed is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting the right when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 A well-known sensor capable of detecting that the ball has passed may be disposed on the upper side, and it may be determined that the player is hitting the right when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a view showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a jackpot occurs, for example, an image is displayed in which a boy character 710 finds a treasure box 715 filled with treasure. This treasure suggests a large number of prize balls that the player earns in the special game state (jackpot state). This display can amplify the joy of winning a prize ball, and thus can provide a sense of satisfaction with being a jackpot. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, a display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters “ROUND3” are displayed in the display area 714. The player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot by confirming this display. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

  Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navi image is displayed as in the special variation state of special symbols or in the short time state of normal symbols. That is, the text "Aim for the right!" Is displayed for the small area Ds3 and arrows pointing to the right are displayed above and below the text. By displaying this right-handed navi image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be hit to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) be able to. If you strike left despite the special gaming state (big hit state), it will be provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and will be released in the special gaming state (big hit state) It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. That is, the player can not lose a large number of winning balls and loses the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player is urged to perform the right strike by displaying the right-handed navi image (see FIG. 6A) even in the special gaming state (big hit state). Thereby, the player is configured to be able to win a winning ball at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, there is formed a number-of-winnings display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (entering) to the general winning opening 602. In the number-of-winnings display area MA, for example, characters of “EXTRA BONUS × 10” are displayed as shown in 6 (a). The word "EXTRA BONUS" means that the winning balls are obtained in a different way from the winning balls obtained by entering the balls into the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a winning ball is obtained by entering the ball into the general winning opening 602. The letter “× 10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 at the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has been entered ten times to the general winning hole 602 in one round to three rounds.

  In addition, a schematic view of the storage device 600 is displayed above the character “EXTRA BONUS × 10”, and a character “EXTRA BONUS gate open” is displayed on the upper side. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (release state). In addition, in the schematic view of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters “Aim for it!” Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . By this balloon, it is possible to recognize that it becomes advantageous (if a large number of winning balls can be obtained) when the player enters a ball into the general winning opening 602.

  FIG. 6 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6 (b), when the entry into the general winning opening 602 is detected in the jackpot, the character "GET" is displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which the ball enters the ball is displayed at a location corresponding to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the schematic view of the storage device 600. Furthermore, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS × 10” to “EXTRA BONUS × 11” in the number-of-winnings display area MA. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a winning ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602.

  In this manner, by displaying the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is different from entering the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a in the jackpot. The player can be made aware of the number of times he has won. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the number of “EXTRA BONUS” (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) increases. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left strike warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the left strike is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that left hitting is performed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the large display area, the characters "Warning" are displayed in a large size, and the characters "Aim for an attacker with a right-handed attack!" By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left strike) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, the player can be made to obtain a large number of winning balls reliably in the special game state (big hit state).

  The determination as to whether or not the player has made a left strike is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is hitting the left, and the left strike warning image Control is performed so that FIG. 7A is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the left hit warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor for detecting passage of a ball is provided on a path (channel) provided on the left side of the game board 13 and a left strike warning image (when passage of the ball is detected by the sensor during a big hit You may comprise so that FIG. 7 (a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 means, for example, when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected despite the special gaming state (big hit state) or the special gaming state (big hit) When entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is detected despite the fact that the state is not), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the characters “Warning” are displayed large in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call a gate error clerk" are displayed. With these characters, it is possible for the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the store clerk or the like in the hall can be requested to repair etc. quickly.

  Also, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of winning balls always paid out, etc., by changing the wiring etc. illegally, etc. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by confirming the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the ball into the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, and aiming at the storage device 600 and striking out the ball prevents the illegal act of increasing the ball without passing the big hit be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the ordinary entry (through gate) 67. The variable display is performed to alternately turn on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (variable time) is set so that the game state is shorter than in the normal state, during the definite change of the special symbol, or during the short time of the normal symbol. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during a certain symbol of the special symbol and during the short pattern of the normal symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is in a certain variation, and the normal symbol is in time.

  In addition, to the second ball entrance 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting or increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a during the definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the special symbol or during the time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electrically operated accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal ball entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is configured to be passable. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is made. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display, as well as the variable display of the second symbol, is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for passing the ball of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) . Further, the number of assembled normal ball entry ports 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the ordinary ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When the ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side in the front view of the variable display unit 80 (below the normal ball entry port 67), a second ball entry port 640 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37 shows a display according to the lottery result.

  In addition, each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is also one of the prize-winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 are configured the same. However, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first ball entry 64 may be different from the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second ball entry 640. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins to the first ball entry 64 is 3 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning to the second ball entry 640 is 5 It is also good.

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role part 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entry port 67, the motorized role 640a is in the open state The state is (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the symbol usually is high compared to that in the normal state, and the time it takes to display the variation of the symbol is short, so the variation of the symbol is normal. It becomes easy to display the symbol of "○" in display. Thus, the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, the time during which the motorized jack 640a is opened also becomes longer than during the normal state, during the special symbol oddity and during the normal symbol time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640, as compared to the normal state, during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part such as that provided at the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can be won.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball hits the second entrance 640. is there. However, as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot, the probability of being a jackpot (big jack B) that is easy to enter the ball into the probability changing ball opening 654 during the special game state is the second entrance ball opening 640 The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins at the first entrance 64.

  During normal operation, the motorized accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640, so the first ball entrance without the motorized symbol is provided. Toward the mouth 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and winning in the first entrance 64 provides many opportunities for a big hit lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the normal ball entry port 67, the motorized role piece 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state during the time change of the special symbol or the time pattern of the normal symbol Since it is easy to win the ball exit 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and it is normally entered. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit B by winning the second ball entry port 640 while making the motorized part open by passing the ball port 67.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the process of being changed, the regular symbol is short, or the normal status is being used). It is possible for the person to change the way of firing the ball to "left strike" and "right strike". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and a horizontally-long rectangular first specified winning hole is disposed substantially in the center A (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if it becomes a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol made due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol for the big hit. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specified winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specified winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specified winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 14 times (14 rounds) at the maximum. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specified winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the first specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening and closing driving to the front side about the lower side of the opening and closing plate ( Not shown). The first specified winning combination opening 65 a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the first specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided on the upper side thereof. . The opening and closing plate covering the second specified winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting to the front side in the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and when it comes to the 12th round, the open / close version covering the second specified winning opening 650a slides to the back side of the front view and is buried to the back side of the game board 13, the ball 2) An open state capable of entering the ball into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14 (b)).

  As described above, based on the ball entering the second specified winning hole 650a in the special gaming state (big hit) based on entering the probability variation ball inlet 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 After the end of the jackpot, transition to a special symbol oddity state. On the other hand, even if the ball does not enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the special gaming state, or enters the second specified winning opening 650a, all the balls normally enter the ball entrance 655 If you do, after the end of the jackpot transition to the normal symbol of the time saving state.

  In addition, a special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a as a winning opening to be opened in the special gaming state, may be further provided another winning opening. Also, conversely, the winning combination may be made only to the first specified winning combination 65a. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of this embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

  A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning ports 601, 602, and out ports 603a to 603c) in its interior, and allows the entered ball to flow down to any of the ball entrances. be able to. In addition, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside of the storage device 600 (stop the flow). Furthermore, the front side of the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover in the front view side, and a ball which has flowed (entered) into the storage device 600 enters into any ball entry port. It is configured to be able to confirm easily. The details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an overview of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured such that a sphere can be introduced into the interior thereof via the guiding channel 605. The storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three of the struck balls when the player strikes the right. The ball that has not entered the induction flow channel 605 flows along the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flows down in the direction of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. That is, in the special gaming state, a part of the ball fired toward the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a causes the player to enter the storage device 600 through the guiding channel 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branching member 604 are provided downstream of the induction flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side in a front view. Most of the balls flowing down the induction flow channel 606 enter a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 601a that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three winning balls are paid out. It should be noted that on the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the balls which did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guiding channel 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided. By these out ports, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the sphere from being deposited inside the storage device 600, and to reliably discharge the sphere which has flowed down the guiding channel 606. Further, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are respectively provided on the out ports 603a and 603b, as in the case of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. The number of ejected balls can be accurately determined by the detection switches 603a1 and 603b1.

  Inside the storage device 600, on the right side in a front view, a guiding channel 607 through which a ball can flow is provided. Most of the gaming balls having flowed down the guidance channel 607 enter a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) capable of detecting that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 602a detects that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 15 winning balls are paid out. That is, compared to the case where the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, more winning balls can be obtained when entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. it can. In addition, out ports 603 b and 603 c are provided on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 respectively. These outports prevent (inhibit) the deposition of balls that did not enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning prize opening) 602 into the inside of the storage device 600, and the balls that flowed down the guiding channel 607 It can be discharged reliably. Further, a detection switch 603c1 (not shown) is provided at the out port 603c, similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 when it becomes a special gaming state (big hit state). In the state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is set to a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to the fact that a large number of winning balls are obtained by opening the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, a general winning opening in the storage device 600 (large value winning The ball is constructed so that a winning ball can be obtained by winning the ball to the mouth 602. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of winning balls is relatively paid out The ball is set to a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the small winning prize opening (small value winning prize entry) 601. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, since there is little merit to bring the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special gaming state, always trying to receive a large amount of payout by aiming the storage device 600. Unusual game methods can be prevented (suppressed). In addition, as mentioned above, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the ball by paying out based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Thus, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit the left.

  A storage valve 607 a is provided in the guide channel 607. The storage valve 607 a can block the guiding flow channel 607 by projecting to the front side in the front view, and can prevent the flow of the ball advanced to the guiding flow channel 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the top of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side in the front view (the state in which the induction channel 607 is closed), and the storage valve 607a is on the rear side in the front view. It is configured to be switchable to a buried state (a state in which the ball can flow down the induction channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607 a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the side of the guiding flow channel 606 by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guiding flow channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protrusion 604 a provided on the branch member 604 is set high enough to prevent the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607 a from flowing out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball entering the storage device 600 will be described for each of two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. Fig.9 (a) is a figure which shows operation | movement of the ball which entered the storage apparatus 600 in the state which the storage valve 607a protruded to the near side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the ball | bowl which entered into the storage apparatus 600 in the state buried in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, half or more of the lower end of the induction channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the induction channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the induction flow channel 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605 a of the induction flow channel 605, and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the induction flow channel 605. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction channel 605 can easily advance to the induction channel 607.

  The sphere advanced to the guiding channel 607 is blocked by the reservoir valve 607a and stops at the top of the reservoir valve 607a (spheres are stored). Then, in the state where the ball is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the ball is stored), when another ball newly flows down the induction flow channel 605, it flows down the induction flow channel 605 anew The contact ball interferes with the ball stored on the storage valve 607a. This contact (interference) changes the trajectory (flowing direction) of the ball which has newly flowed down the induction channel 605.

  Since the guiding channel 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guiding channel 605 (see FIG. 9A), the spheres stored on the storage valve 607a are newly added to the guiding channel 605. It is almost always the case that you stop on the right side of the ball coming down. Therefore, the ball which has newly flowed down the guiding channel 605 is repelled to the left in a front view by colliding with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, the ball which has newly flowed down the induction flow channel 605 travels to the induction flow channel 606 provided on the left in front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the guiding flow channel 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls to be paid out (three winning balls). That is, when the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side in front view and the ball can not flow down the induction channel 607 (the induction channel 607 is closed), most of the spheres entering the storage device 600 are general Enter the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is in the state of being buried behind in the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the flow of the ball advanced to the guiding channel 607, so the guiding channel 607 The ball which has advanced to the lower side flows down the induction channel 607 as it is and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, since the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is a winning opening with a relatively large number (15) of winning balls to be paid out, the player has many merits for winning.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be in a state in which the ball can flow down the induction channel 607 (see FIG. 9B) when the jackpot is hit. Therefore, in the special game state, by performing a right strike, the ball is awarded to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, and in addition to the fact that a large number of winning balls can be obtained A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the obtained ball being awarded to the general winning opening (large value winning hole) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Also, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a and is relatively paid out. It is set such that the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, since there is little merit to bring the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special gaming state, always trying to receive a large amount of payout by aiming the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction channel 607 enters the general entrance 602 Although it is comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, a well-known Kroon device provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different winning balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. It is also good. As a result, even if the guiding flow channel 606 flows down, many winning balls can be obtained by entering the winning opening with a relatively large number of winning balls paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters any one winning opening. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage flow channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607 a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the guide flow channel 607. You may comprise so that a ball may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow passage 607, and in a state other than the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the electromagnet is magnetized by being energized. As a result, the ball first flowing into the guiding channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for embedding the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Thus, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a was made into one ball, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that two or more spheres can be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out port, a winning port may be provided in which a winning ball is paid out. In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out may be made different by entering the ball into each winning opening. More specifically, for example, the winning opening is provided with six winning openings instead of the out opening 603a, the winning opening is provided with ten winning balls instead of the out opening 603b, and the winning opening is provided instead of the out opening 603c. There may be 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the induction channel 606 or to which winning opening the ball enters the induction channel 607. In addition, a member capable of changing the flow-down direction of the ball such as a nail may be provided downstream of the guiding flow channel 606 or the guiding flow channel 607, and the winning opening on which any ball enters may be more random. . In this way, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters the winning opening. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry port where a ball can easily enter the ball by a store clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball-fall rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hole side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the route when the player ejects a ball to the right of the game board 13 (when hit to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a view showing a portion on the upstream side of the storage device 600 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 10, in the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13, a normal ball entry port 67 is provided at the upper part thereof. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. And if it becomes a hit of a normal symbol, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, after the fluctuation production for showing the lottery result of a normal symbol is performed, the "o" symbol which shows a hit of a normal symbol is displayed. Then, based on the display of the “o” symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal ball entry port 67 is It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds × 1 time or 1 second × 2 times). While the motorized role piece 640 is open, the ball hitting the right easily enters the second ball entry port 640. As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity and during the regular symbol time, while the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening period of the motorized symbol is extended, so The ball enters the ball entry port 640 easily. Therefore, by executing the right strike, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol without reducing the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a portion on the downstream side of the second ball entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, among the balls that flowed down to the downstream of the right path (flow path) by the player hitting the right, the balls that flowed down to the storage device 600 without flowing into the storage device 600 1 Flow down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball which has flowed down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and has not entered the first specified winning opening 65 a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

  Thus, the ball can be made to flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player performing a right strike. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can enter the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a simply by performing a right hit, and a large amount of balls can be inserted. You can win a prize ball. In addition, a part of the ball launched by aiming at the first specified winning hole 65 a or the second specified winning hole 650 a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special game state (big hit state), most of the balls entering the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), During the special game state, the player can win more balls. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable in the front view front direction. By opening the first specified winning opening 65a, the gaming ball having flowed down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 enters the first specified winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specified winning opening 65a is in a special game state (big hit state) 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls) It will be released until the prize). Then, when the ball enters the first specified winning combination opening 65a, 15 winning balls are paid out for the entry of one ball. Thus, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the second specified winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 may be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding to the back in the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the gaming ball having flowed down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 enters a state where it can enter the ball. As described above, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a, 15 winning balls are paid out for the entry of one ball. Thus, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball which has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handling and reached the first specified winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is closed, the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a. Because it can not be done, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specified winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13 (a)). Then, the ball dropped to the front side of the first specified winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specified winning opening 65a. In addition, since the flow path under the first specified winning hole 65a is inclined in the direction of the second specified winning hole 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specified winning hole 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is opened, as shown in FIG. (1) The opening portion of the specified winning hole 65a is located. Thus, the ball enters the first specified winning hole 65a. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), a ball discharge port 65 c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the inside of the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball outlet 65c, the ball winning is detected and the winning balls are paid out, and the ball entered into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specified winning hole 65a. Can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball discharge port 65c, all the balls entering the first specified winning hole 65a enter the ball discharge port 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be discharged reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball which has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handing and reached the second specified winning opening 650 a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a view in the case where the ball reaches the second specified winning opening 650a in a state in which the second specified winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specified winning hole 650a with the second specified winning hole 650a closed, the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. As a result, the upper part of the second specified winning hole 650a flows down and falls to the left of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball dropped to the left side of the second specified winning opening 650a flows down to the out port 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left of the second specified winning port 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specified winning hole 650a with the second specified winning hole 650a open, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the ball is placed on the extension of the flow path where it has flowed down. 2) The opening portion of the specified winning hole 650a is located. Thus, the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, the ball's winning is detected and the winning balls are paid out, and the ball entered into the second variable winning device 650 from the second specified winning hole 650a. Can be discharged. The bottom portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 650c, so all the balls entering the second specified winning hole 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be discharged reliably.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, the downstream structure of the ball outlet 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the special game state (big hit state), in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the ball enters the probability changing ball inlet 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the jackpot, it is configured to shift to a special symbol oddity state. The probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (the induction flow path 652 and the induction flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the induction flow path 652). It is done. Further, at the upper end of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650 d for setting a flow path in which the ball flows down is provided. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball can not move forward, and open the other flow path so that the ball can move forward. It is done. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated with the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), and according to the elapsed time in the 12th round of the big hit Placement is switched.

  Fig.15 (a) and FIG.15 (b) are the figures which showed the operation | movement of the ball | bowl by arrangement | positioning of the flow-path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a view showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow channel 652 is closed, the ball entering the ball outlet 650c can not advance to the induction flow channel 652 by being blocked by the flow channel switching valve 650d. Thus, the ball travels to the induction channel 653 (see FIG. 15 (a)). Usually, a ball inlet 655 is provided downstream of the induction channel 653. That is, while it becomes the arrangement | positioning shown to Fig.15 (a), the ball can not be made to enter into the definite variation ball inlet 654. In the present embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650 d is configured as shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15 (b) is a view showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (excitation) the passage solenoid 611. In the arrangement for closing the induction flow channel 653, the ball entering the ball outlet 650c can advance to the induction flow channel 652 without being blocked by the flow channel switching valve 650d. Thus, the ball travels to the induction channel 653 and enters the ball ball ball 654 provided downstream thereof.

  By entering the ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654, it is set to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state at the end of the big hit (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specified winning opening 650a is opened is finished, a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state after the big hit end to the player in the subsequent rounds is executed. That is, if the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds, the display effect suggesting transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol in 13 rounds to 15 rounds is the third symbol display device 81 Is executed in On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds, the display effect suggesting transition to the time saving state of the normal symbol in 13 rounds to 15 rounds is the third symbol display device 81 Is executed in As described above, by setting the round in which the large two special winning opening 650a is opened to the twelfth round, a sufficient period of time to execute the suggested effect suggesting the gaming state after the big hit ends in the remaining rounds of the big hit is secured. be able to.

  As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the inlet of the storage device 600. The more easily it flows, the harder it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it will be difficult for the ball to enter the probability ball entry 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B. Conversely, the more easily the ball enters the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, so it is easier for the ball to enter the probability ball entry 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease of inflow of the balls into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the proportion of the balls into the probability ball inlet 654. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of flow into the storage device 600, for example, adjustment of a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 may be mentioned. That is, as the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to be closer to each other, the ball is less likely to pass between these two nails, and thus the ball is less likely to flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter a ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it can be made easy to shift to the special variation state of special symbol. On the other hand, as the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to move away from each other, the ball can more easily pass between the two nails, so that the ball can more easily flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, since it becomes easy for a ball to flow into the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it is possible to make it difficult to shift to a special variation of the pattern. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the inlet of the storage device 600, it is possible to change the specs of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the probability change state of the special symbol), so pachinko according to the sales policy of each hole. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a is different in jackpot A and jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B is configured to be more likely to enter the ball into the probability change ball entrance 654 in the special gaming state (jackpot state) than the jackpot A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650 a and the flow path switching valve 650 d in the 12th round of the jackpot A. The upper graph in FIG. 16 (a) shows the time change (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16 (a) The figure on the lower side shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction channel 652 on the left side downstream of the ball outlet 650c is open or the induction channel 653 on the right side is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the 12th round is started, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and is set to the open state based on the 7 seconds having elapsed. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, the ball is set to an open state until ten balls enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a or 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. Be done. Then, when the twelfth round is finished, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the 12 rounds of big hit next.

  Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650 d is set so that the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side is closed and the sphere can flow down the induction flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). (B)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started, and based on passage of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and the sphere is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). In addition, since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, it is possible to switch the flow path before the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the sphere can flow down in the induction channel 653 is the next big hit and continues until the end of the 11th round. Then, on the basis of the end of the 11th round and the interval period of 3 seconds, the ball is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period during which the player is playing a game, the ball can pass through the guiding channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d. The sphere is set to be able to pass through the induction channel 652 from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12 rounds to the limited 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12 rounds Only for the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if an illegal act of entering the ball into the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is performed other than the 12th round of the special gaming state, the ball enters the ball ball 654 with certainty Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that the probability change state of the special symbol is illegally obtained.

  The timing of switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the state where the induction channel 652 is opened at the start of 12 rounds, or in the middle of the interval period set after the 11 rounds have ended (for example, after the interval starts) It may be configured to switch (when 0.5 seconds have elapsed). Thus, the period during which the induction flow path 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter period, so that the ball is illegally entered into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 while the second specified winning opening 650a is closed. Even if the ball is allowed to enter the ball, the ball can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball entrance 654. That is, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, a period in which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650 d is open, and the second specified winning opening (second large open opening) 650 a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the overlapping periods hardly overlap (they overlap only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the 12th round is started). Therefore, in many cases when it becomes the jackpot A, since the ball does not enter the definite insertion ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), it becomes difficult to be set in the definite variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  In addition, in order to make it hard to understand that it is jackpot A immediately after the start of 12 rounds to open the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth (the 2nd large opening mouth) 650a in 0.2 seconds immediately after 12 rounds are started It is. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), the second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) immediately after the start of 12 rounds at the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry ball 654 ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a immediately after the start of 12 rounds with the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the present jackpot is the jackpot B be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16 (b), the time change of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16 (b) The figure on the lower side shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction channel 652 on the left side downstream of the ball outlet 650c is open or the induction channel 653 on the right side is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the 12th round is started, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set in the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and is set to the closed state based on the elapse of 5 seconds. The second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is also when 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds. It is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the 12 rounds of big hit next.

  Further, as described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650 d is set to perform an operation common to the jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed to allow the sphere to flow down the left induction flow path 652 (See FIG. 15 (b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds pass after the 12th round is started, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the reverse direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and the sphere is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, a period in which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open, and the second specified winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is set so that the overlapping period is up to 5 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to enter the ball into the definite change ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the middle hit) in many cases when it becomes the big hit B, after the end of the big hit is set to a definite change state of the special symbol It will be easier.

  In addition, the open pattern of the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth (the 2nd large open mouth) 650a is not something which is limited to this, the pattern where the ball is easy to enter the ball to the definite deformation ball entrance 654, and the definite deformation ball entry 654 It may be set arbitrarily as long as it is possible to set a pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d can also be determined arbitrarily without being limited to the form of the present embodiment. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 at the start of 12 rounds (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6.) The flow path switching valve 650d may be set to allow the sphere to flow down after the lapse of 5 seconds (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Furthermore, the second specified winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds, and for example, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the 15th round. It may be set to As a result, the opportunity to enter the ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654 can be increased, so that it is possible to make the special symbol more likely to be in the definite variation state after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, despite having won the jackpot B, the ball can not enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the player's motivation for the game is reduced. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out ports 603a to 603c is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are removed. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of the display result in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later along with the description of the first random number counter C1, but any of the judgment values specified in the first random number table 202a may be the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning combination If it matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type , And is specified in association with the type of the entrance that became the lottery trigger of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" A jackpot A is associated with and defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d It is comprised so that it may become the period which the flow path 653 is open | released (refer Fig.16 (a)). Therefore, it is difficult to cause the balls to flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650 d, so the spheres to the probability change ball inlet 654 provided downstream of the induction flow path 652 It will be difficult to enter the ball. That is, when it becomes the jackpot A, it becomes difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the jackpot B is associated with the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 2 in FIG. 18 (b)). As described above, in the case of the jackpot B, all of the periods in which the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round, the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d The channel 652 is configured to overlap with the open period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained simply by causing the ball to enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The ball can flow down to the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, the positive change ball inlet 654 is provided downstream of the induction flow channel 652. Therefore, when it becomes jackpot B, it becomes easy to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Moreover, the jackpot B is matched and prescribed | regulated in the range whose value of the 1st type | classification counter C2 is "20-99". That is, the number of judgment values for the jackpot B is increased when the jackpot for the special symbol 2 is a jackpot compared to when the jackpot for the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. Therefore, the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of special symbol 2 is configured to be easy to become big hit B.

  As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of the special symbol, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit B if the terminal is big and the probability variation of the special symbol after the big hit is over Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to obtain a large number of winning balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). Moreover, in the high probability state of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed as a judgment value used as a hit of a normal symbol (refer 202 c 2 of FIG.18 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 34) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a winning on the first entrance 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) and a second ball input The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning in the mouth 640 is respectively provided, and in each of these areas, at the timing of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a definite variation state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which of the values "0 to 9" is the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired? It is determined that any of “0 to 9” is determined to be a jackpot. Among the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first "400 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is 10 pieces of "0 to 9", so the jackpot of the special symbol and the odds of the special symbol The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in the low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first "400" of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one piece of "200", so the special symbol is in the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and the random number value for the big jack stored in the first random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number which is dislocated, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the disapproval of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1, and the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Moreover, it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1, and the big hit type in the case where the random number value is any of "50 to 99" becomes "big hit B". Furthermore, it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Moreover, it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type in the case where the random number value is any of "20 to 99" is "big hit B".

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, it is configured that the same jackpot type is selected by the value of the same first hit type counter C2 in the case where it became a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where it became the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 2 You may With such a configuration, the amount of data in the first type-based selection table 202b can be reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 as described above. ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various types are defined as a deviation pattern for disengaging , "Normal reach" various types, "Super reach" various types are defined as the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 18 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) (refer to 202c1 of FIG. 18 (c)), and for normal symbol from its low probability and It is divided into two kinds, (for 202c2 reference in Fig. 18 (c)) for high probability (time period of normal symbol and time period which is special variation of symbol) with high probability of becoming The number of random numbers to be jackpots is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be different, the probability of becoming a hit between the low probability of the normal symbol (the normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (the short time of the normal symbol) Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 of FIG. 18 (c) reference). As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the electric role object 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the short time of the normal symbol, and during the definite variation of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" . These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as “), and the electric role object 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened“ one second × two times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and furthermore, the open period of the electric symbol 640a is Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance ball hole 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is "one second x 2 times". Although it is open only, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 19, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Here, the details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation effective flag 203o A definite variation effective timer 203p, an ejection number counter 203q, a short time counter 203r, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first entrance ball opening The values of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning on the second entrance 640 are respectively stored. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination) 3) It is a counter which counts the number of balls held (number of standbys) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d in that the number of holding balls held in the second entrance 640 and stored is held. Since it is only different, the detailed description is omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entry slot 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31) S703: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change status of the special symbol (during the probability variation of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when off, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability change flag 203g is a big hit by drawing a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, in a state where the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is configured to be backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether to shift the gaming state to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball has entered the probability variation ball entrance 654 during the special gaming status (big hit status) . When the gaming ball enters the definite variation ball entry 654, the entering variation is detected by a non-illustrated probability variation switch, and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is shut off, and if it is determined that it is passing, the probability change setting flag 203h May be set to turn on formally and return. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the positive variation switch has been passed before the power is shut off can be determined depending on whether the positive variation passage counter 203i described later has a value larger than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch in one round in the jackpot state (the 12th round of jackpots in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all gaming balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when passing the probability variation switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after the processing of whether the number of gaming balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to zero.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65 a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning opening of the second variable winning device 650 (second This is a counter for counting the number of balls entering the large open port) 650a. Specifically, based on the ball entering the ball being detected by the prize sensors (not shown) respectively provided to the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, it is added one by one and updated (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is over, the number (winning number counter 203 j) of winnings in the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65 a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a It is reset to "0", which is an initial value, after it is determined whether or not the discharged number (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) matches. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to zero.

  As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, so in each round, the number-of-winnings counter 203j is substantially The number of balls entering the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, so in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j substantially corresponds to the second specific winning opening (second The number of balls entering the large open port) 650a will be counted.

  In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the winning Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are entered respectively. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of spheres.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) an elapsed time after the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the operation counter 203k counts (counts) an elapsed time after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set to the state in which the ball can enter into the ball socket 654. In the pachinko machine 10, the passage switching valve 650d is turned clockwise about the switching shaft 650e by turning on (excitation) the passage solenoid 611 based on the end of the 11 rounds of the big hit, The induction channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excitation) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds of an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control unit 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 611 is set to be off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is shut off. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, by being initialized.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in one round. It shows that it was set from the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, a remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203 n is a counter for determining the time after the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65 a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a is closed, It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game balls having flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  In the remaining ball timer 203n, the first specified winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is closed (1 to 11 rounds, 13 to 15 rounds), or the second specified winning combination is finished. It is necessary for the game ball which has flowed into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds) It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game balls to be paid out in the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is two seconds, it corresponds to three seconds (two seconds plus one second) to which a margin of one second is added. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203 n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203 n is updated and the value reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (rounds 1 to 11 and 13 to 15) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether the number of winning prizes for (12 rounds) and the number of paid-out coins match (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, if it is determined that the winning number and the discharging number do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be early notified that ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact etc. is given at the start timing of the 12th round of the next jackpot to make the ball enter the ball socket 654 with certainty. It can control cheating.

  In addition, when the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the probability change setting is made even if the ball enters the probability change ball entry 654. The flag 203 h may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, either the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. Although updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203 n is started when it is detected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The probability change valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the ball is to be validated when the game ball enters the probability change ball slot 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. It is. When the probability variation effective flag 203o is set to ON, the sphere that has flowed into the induction flow channel 652 (see FIG. 15B) is based on the fact that the flow channel solenoid 611 is turned on. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it indicates that entering the ball into the probability variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period required to enter the probability variation ball port 654 normally. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball having flowed into the guiding channel 652 to enter the probability transformation ball inlet 654 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds added with a margin of 0.2 seconds. If the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654 after the lapse of 1.2 seconds, it is controlled that the definite variation setting flag 203h is not updated since there is a high possibility that some cheating has been made. .

  Thereby, in a state in which the flow path switching valve 650 d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the probability change ball inlet 654), the ball is entered into the probability ball insertion 654 or a probability ball is inserted From the downstream of the mouth 654, push up the gaming ball with a piano wire etc. and make it pass through the probability change ball inlet 654, or cause damage due to fraud that false detection is made that the ball has entered the probability ball inlet 654 with radio waves etc. It can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203 q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. Each of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting discharge of a ball. Every time discharge of a ball is detected by the ball discharge port switch, the discharge number counter 203 q adds 1 to its value (see S 1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203 q is an initial value Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining short time (the number of times the special symbol changes) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. At this time, the counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in this embodiment, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol of 100 times is provided.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222 a and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (completely out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set in counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  Also, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e The probability change state flag 223f, the short time state counter 223g, the large hit middle flag 223h, and the allowable time counter 223i are at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning), or the main controller 110 changes the special symbol in the special symbol Is executed, and the number of balls held is subtracted, a ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1908 in FIG. 43). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b based on the holding ball number command output from the main control unit 110 And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The definite change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite change state of a special symbol. If this probability variation state flag 223 f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if off, it indicates that the probability probability state of the special symbol is. The probability variation state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). It is determined whether the present is a definite variation state of the special symbol according to the state of the definite variation state flag 223f, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the definite variation state of the special symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) It is determined whether or not to display.

  The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol, and if off, it indicates that the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short state counter 223g is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) It is determined whether or not to display.

  The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If this jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state), if it is off a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (special symbol oddity, ordinary) Indicates that the symbol is in the short time or normal condition). The jackpot flag 223h is set to ON when the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the large hit flag 223 h is set to OFF when the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S 1917 in FIG. 43). That is, when the special gaming state (big hit state) ends, it is set to off. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the jackpot flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navi image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) It is determined whether or not to display (see).

  Allowable time counter 223i is just before switching the state of storage valve 607a, to the guiding channel 606, or to any entrance (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602) the ball that has flowed into the guiding channel 607. It is a counter for counting the time until it enters the ball (ball out time). If the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602 by counting the ball swelling period, it is more accurately determined whether the ball entering is normal or not. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i sets a counter value corresponding to one second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). In addition, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is executed, one is subtracted (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, with the storage valve 607a closed, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or when the storage valve 607a is opened, the general winning opening 601 is reached. When the ball enters the ball, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guiding channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May. Similarly, if the ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. May be a ball. In the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched in order to treat these as normal entering balls (without displaying a warning image), the allowable time counter 233i is switched to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. When the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed) until one second set as the counter value has elapsed. Is configured as.

  The number-of-winnings counter 223 j is a counter for counting the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the big hit. The value of the number-of-winnings counter 223 j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is set to 1 each time the jackpot information command corresponding to the entry into the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is received at the jackpot. Are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in this embodiment, the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state) is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 6 (a)). The number-of-winnings counter 223 j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of hits displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image alternates with the third symbol display device 81 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a town, a sea, the sky and the like are displayed. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored as a back surface image in the back surface image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag A storage image data determination flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j are provided at least.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a which are normally closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state from now on. It is an effect, and a round effect is an effect for notifying a player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage," "empty stage" and "island stage") is displayed Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) (see S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) in which the contents of the instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later (see FIG. 24) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2403), the pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 24), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process (FIG. 50 (b (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3902 of FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), each clears to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210) A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. Moreover, in the case of the jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the jack off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1 to 11 rounds and the 13 to 15 rounds, the first specified winning opening (first open opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won). In the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the process of S218 ends, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and for high probability On the basis of the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is made common in the lottery of special symbol 1 and the lottery of special symbol 2, according to the lottery of special symbol 1 or the lottery of special symbol 2 It may be a different random value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values to be the jackpot may be made different. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the probability change flag 203g is not on (that is, off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first hit random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which is the same match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes) , A jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the special symbol with two types (big hit Of A and jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of “disengagement (for long time)”, “disengagement (for short time)”, “disappearing normal reach”, “divergence as a fluctuation pattern for detachment” There are various types of "super reach" and "special reach". In addition, as the fluctuation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, various “shared normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot B, “special reach” is specified. It is defined, and "common normal reach" various, "common super reach" various, and "common special reach" various types are specified as the variation pattern of the hit and the off common use.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (refer to FIG. 34), these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters, and performing a suspension process of the value.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 differ from each other only in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are performed with the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are identical, their detailed description is omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is finished, the pre-reading process is executed (S413), and the present process is finished.

  Next, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413). This pre-reading process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 If there is no new winning combination (S501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first winning slot 64 or the second entering slot 640 has a new winning (S501: Yes), whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite variation state of the special symbol or not If it is determined (S502) and the special symbol is in a definite variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the gaming state is not a definite variation of special symbol (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 which are the judgment results of the big hit are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640 It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time shortening state of the normal symbol is (S608: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol It is determined whether it is medium (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, in the special gaming state). That is, if it becomes easy to become a hit of an ordinary symbol, the ball that strikes the right easily enters the second entry port 640, so to the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a. And the ball will be difficult to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the hit probability of the normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. There is.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not the hit is a normal symbol is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239" It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202 c 2 of FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, like the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times of opening and the opening time of the motorized part 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, The opening period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second entrance port 640 is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol It determines (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is performed next. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is of the empty hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Of these, the first area is stored (S 705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S911) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power supply recovery is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a definite variation state, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the number of time reductions of the normal symbol. A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the hour / minute counter 203 r and the state of the probability change flag 203 g and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, recognition of the game state can be made to coincide between the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, despite the fact that the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5 (a)) is displayed despite the low probability state of the special symbol, or conversely, the player is in spite of being the definite variation state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed when the user performs right-handed driving. That is, the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S 914 ends, a rendering permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S 915). Then, an interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control for opening or closing the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 The process is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, opening of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state And set the closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized item opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S309, the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, in the first symbol display device 37 Ends the fluctuation display being executed, and stops the stop symbol (the first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). Display (light on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  Next, based on the saved winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set in the winning information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines the presence or absence of a malfunction in the storage valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an unusual game (such as performing a left hit in a jackpot state, a left hit in a definite variation state of a special symbol, and the like).

  When the process of S1008 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1010: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the first specific winning It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 ends, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this process ends. As described above, when the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball entering the storage device 600 can flow down the guiding channel 607, so the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (15). It becomes possible to enter a sphere to 602 (see FIG. 9 (b)).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13. Since the player is in the special game state, the player is aimed at the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a to obtain a winning ball. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the winning balls based on the ball entering the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a, a general winning provided in the storage device 600 A player can be made to win a winning ball based on entering a ball (large value winning hole) 602. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be acquired from the start to the end of the jackpot can be increased, so that the player can be made to play the game with a greater enjoyment of becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, a definite variation state of a special symbol or a short time state of a normal symbol is given. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right hitting. Do (I will try to receive a lottery of special symbol 2). This often allows the balls to flow into the storage device 600 before the next jackpot is initiated. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set in the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, the jackpot next becomes a jackpot, and when the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. That is, immediately after the jackpot is started, the player can acquire a large number (15) of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to secure the balls for playing the jackpot game without newly requesting the lending of the balls in a situation where the jackpot is won but the balls have run out.

  If the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress by the process of S1104 (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). And when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation for setting the operation of the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether it is the 12th round of jackpot that is newly started (S1201), not the 12th round (ie 1 to 11 rounds, and 13 to 15 rounds) If it is determined that it is either (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Thus, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16 (a) is executed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16 (b) is controlled. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the induction channel 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after 12 rounds are started. Next, the opening operation of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a read in the process of S1203 is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is finished, a round number command indicating a round to be newly started is set (S1206), and this process is ended. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the channel solenoid 611? It discriminates (S1107). If it is determined in the process of S1107 that the operation timing is reached (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the 15 rounds which is the final round of the jackpot, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside of is passed, it is judged as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined by the processing of S1108 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending processing is executed (S1109), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 ends, next, the storage valve 607a set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. Thus, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, the storage valve 607a prevents the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 from being blocked. It will not be possible to let the ball flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special gaming state (normal gaming state), by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, it is fundamentally an irregular game method that increases the number of balls only by the payout of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to play a game expecting to be a big hit by making a lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, as mentioned above, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and the ball can not be increased by the payout based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of hitting the right in the normal state, and to allow the player to play a game with the aim of becoming a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

  In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball that has made a right strike enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so a definite variation state of the special symbol or a normal symbol In the time saving state (that is, in the state where the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 provided on the right path of the game board 13 is easily released) It can be done. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol is in a definite variation state or the normal symbol is in a short time state, and the player moves to a state advantageous to the player, the ball holding number decreases rapidly and the state is advantageous. It can prevent (suppress) that the player can not feel it. Therefore, the game can be continued without loss of balls in the special symbol's definite variation state or the normal symbol's time saving state.

  The number of winning balls for entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, one winning ball may be used). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the payout is too much and the ball is too large in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the time shortening state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the hole an unexpected disadvantage. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640), the merit of performing right hitting can be reduced.

  When the process of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303). When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, the ball to the probability variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot Since this means that the ball has entered, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). By this, after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to a special symbol oddity state. After the processing of S1304, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1303 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot. Then, in order to set the short term of 100 times of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot, the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is set to 100 (S1307). Then, a status command including information indicating that the time saving status has been set is set (S1308), and this processing ends. The state command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability change setting flag 203 h is on. If the probability change setting flag 203 h is on, the probability change flag 203 g is set on. That is, regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched. Therefore, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if it is possible to enter the ball into the ball socket 654 in the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, so the special game state (d During state), it is possible to be interested in whether or not the ball enters the definite ball entrance 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1109: No), then, the first specified winning opening 65a, and the second specified winning opening 650a ball entry (winning) or probability change A winning process is performed to monitor the entry (winning) of the ball into the entrance 654 (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether it is a period (round effective period) in which a round game is set (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period until the interval period (3 seconds) ends after opening of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a is set. If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a ( S1402). If it is determined in the process of S1402 that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403) , Shift the process to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not entered any of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1404. And transition.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the winning opening set in the open state among the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a Is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it is determined that the ball is being discharged for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), a round time (30 in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of big hit ends. It is determined whether second) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by decrementing by 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the definite variation ball inlet 654 (whether or not it has passed a probability variation switch not shown) (S1410) ). If it is determined that the ball has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i to update it (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), The process shifts to step S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the sphere has not passed the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that it is not 0 (S1413: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1413 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the induction channel 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 off (S1414), and the probability change is effective The flag 203o is set to on (S1415), and the process ends. By setting the probability change effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow passage switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow passage 652 is closed, the sphere remaining in the induction flow passage 652 is a probability change switch When passing through, the probability change setting flag 203h can be controlled to be set on (that is, a probability change state of a special symbol is given after a big hit).

  If it is determined in the process of S1408 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, off) (S1416: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2s in the present embodiment) (S1418), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes) The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if passage of the probability change switch is detected, control is performed so as not to update the value of the probability change setting flag 203h. As described above, when passage of the probability variation switch is detected after the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p becomes the upper limit value, it is highly possible that the detection is due to some fraudulent act. Therefore, by turning off the probability variation effective flag 203o, the update of the probability variation setting flag 203h is prohibited to control the fraud.

  When the process of S1419 ends, next, the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1420), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1418 that the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit (less than the upper limit) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch, so the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time during which passage of the probability variation switch is determined to be effective, it is possible to suppress passing of the ball to the probability variation switch illegally and giving of the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, next, an abnormal process for detecting an abnormality occurring during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and the present process is ended. Here, the details of the abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501), and when it is determined that it is out of a round effective period (S1501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 It discriminates (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball exclusion counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being drained, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball discharging period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203 n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, three seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specified winning opening 65 a or the second specified winning opening 650 a is set) If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (the value of the number-of-winnings counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of balls discharged matches the number of winnings (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ejected balls and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an output of an error signal to the hall computer is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the game ball is made to remain illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch passes the ball.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharged number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1511), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passage situation of the ball to the various winning openings (ball entrance).

  In the winning information command setting process, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether there is new winning detection information (whether there is a new entry for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603) This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that new winning detection information exists (S1602: Yes), a ball entry opening (winning opening) that detects the ball entry (winning) according to the new winning detection information. A prize information command including the information of is set (S1603). The prize information command is formed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each bit of 2 bytes is associated with each prize opening, out opening, and the like. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) at which the ball entered the ball (winning) is detected is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning port (ball opening) at which the ball is not entering is set to 0 After being set, it is output as a prize information command. When the process of S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the present process is ended.

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines, based on the prize information command, whether there is a defect in the intelligent storage device 600, whether the player is playing an irregular game, or the like. Then, when a failure or the like occurs, a display error command corresponding to the type of the failure is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display error command, the third symbol display device 81 reports an error.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is performed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current startup process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1702). As described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1816. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1816 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1816 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. And from) it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is corrupted (S1703: Yes), and the process moves to S1704. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1516 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S1816. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is performed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is performed, the process of S1708 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1709), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). The permission is set (S1711), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1704 through S1706 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability change status flag 223f and the probability change status counter 223g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command received from the main control unit 110 (S1711), interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the main processing is performed. Transition. By updating the probability variation status flag 223f and the probability variation status counter 223g based on the status command, it is possible to match the gaming status recognized by the main control device 110 with the gaming status recognized by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that, when the process of S1708 is reached via the processes of S1704 to S1706, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current S1801 process has been executed (S1801), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the process of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1802 to S1810, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S 1811 and the variable display setting process of S 1812 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1811 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802 ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1804). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1805 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S 1811). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S 1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S 1813 (S 1813: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S 1814) If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1907). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of variation display in special symbol), or the special symbol 2 holding ball of main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, when the ball has won the first ball entry 64 and the second ball entry 640 (start prize) from the main control unit 110, or when the lottery of the special symbol is performed As it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 holding ball by the process of S1908 The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability change status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and this processing ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined based on the winning information command whether or not the ball has entered the ball normally, and an error is notified if there is a possibility of failure or injustice. An error notification process for performing the process is executed (S1912), and this process is ended.

  on the other hand. If it is determined in the process of S1911 that a winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), it is then determined whether an opening command has been received (S1913), and if an opening command has been received (S1911) S1913: Yes), while setting the jackpot flag 223h to ON, the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, a display opening command is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an opening effect for notifying of the start of the big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the large hitting medium flag 223h is set to off, and the value of the allowable time counter 223i corresponds to one second (1000). Is set (S1917), an end command for display is set (S1918), and this processing is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 displays an ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1919) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of a failure or a fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification process (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931), and if on (S1931: Yes), among the winning information notified by the received winning information command It is determined whether or not the winning information to the first ball entrance 64 is included (S 1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information to the first ball entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), as a result of the player hitting the left despite the big hit, the first ball entrance 64 Means that the ball has entered the ball. That is, the player is performing a game method (how to strike) in which the ball is difficult to enter the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a despite the special gaming state (big hit state), It means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to cause the player to obtain a prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left hitting warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and processing To step S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. The left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) makes it possible to urge the player making a left strike in the special gaming state (big hit state) to perform a right strike. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing and to obtain the winning balls more reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1932 that the prize information command does not include the prize information corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (S1932: No), the process of S1933 is skipped and processed. To step S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit The hit notification process for giving a notification when it is present is executed (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the flash period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is Since this means that the process has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and this process ends. That is, when the ball which has flowed (advanced) into the guiding flow channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the flash stroke period. To prevent it from being judged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1931 that the big hit medium flag 223h is not on (is off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined that it is 0 (S1936: Yes), a notification is given when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a at normal time (any of special variation of symbol, time variation of normal symbol, and normal condition) In step S1937, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit Since this means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the processing of S1937 is skipped, and the present processing ends. That is, when the ball which has flowed (advanced) into the guiding channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed, the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 during the ball pouring period. To prevent it from being judged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the hit notification process (S1935) for giving a notification when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit notification process (S1935).

  In the hit notification process (S1935), first, in the winning information command determined to be received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is entered. It is determined whether the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). And, if the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot that the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guiding channel 606. That is, the storage valve 607a is not opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and as a result that the state in which the ball is stored to the upper part of the storage valve 607a continues, the ball can be guided to the guiding channel 606 There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In addition, the ball that has flowed into the guiding channel 606 may enter the out port 603a disposed on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball may enter the out port 603a. Regarding the corresponding winning information, it is not a determination target whether or not a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a. This is because, among the balls flowing into the induction channel 606, the proportion of the balls flowing down to the out port 603a is small, and the majority enters the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, and the big hit Since a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred by monitoring the general prize winning opening (small value winning prize opening) 601. In addition, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the player has entered the out port 603a by determining only the prize information corresponding to entering the general prize port (small value winning port) 601. The processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1941, when it is determined that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is not included (S1941: No), next, the received prize information command is It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the prize entry (large value prize entry) 602 is included (S1943), and the prize corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (large value prize entry) 602 If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image during the big hit according to the value of the winning number counter 233 j after update, a display rear image change command is set (S 1945).

  The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the display content of the winning number display area MA is updated in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. More specifically, update is performed after an image for which the number of hits (number of EXTRA BONUS hits) to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. An image shown in FIG. 6 (a) corresponding to the subsequent number of ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of hits for the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot on the number-of-winnings display area MA, entering the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a in the jackpot The player can be made aware of the number of times he has won the prize ball separately. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the number of times of entering the ball at the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 increases. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when ball entry information corresponding to entering a ball into the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 is included, it is determined that the storage valve 604a has a malfunction. However, the display error command may be set also when the prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the entry of the ball into the out port 603a. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, a notification is given when there is a failure in storage valve 607a at a normal time (any of a special symbol, a variation of a normal symbol, a short time of a normal symbol, and a normal condition). The normal notification process will be described. In this normal notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined not to be on (S1951), the present is not a probability variation state of special symbol (S1951) Since this means that the special symbol is in a low probability state), it is then determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is neither a definite variation state of a special symbol nor a time shortening state of a normal symbol (a normal state) means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether the player is hitting the right and whether or not the operation of the storage valve 607a has a problem, first, a general winning opening (large value is received in the received winning information command). It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the prize entry port 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not the special gaming state (big hit state) Is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player is entering the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in an incorrect manner. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and the present process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the state where the storage valve 607a remains open due to a problem, the balls flowing into the guiding channel 607 are out ports 603b disposed on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. , 603c may also enter the ball, but with regard to the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out ports 603b, 603c, it is not a determination target of whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because the percentage of the balls flowing down to the out ports 603b and 603c among the balls flowing into the guiding channel 607 is small, and the majority enters the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. By monitoring the general winning combination (large value winning combination) 602, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. In addition, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the player has entered the out port 603b or 603c by determining only the prize information corresponding to entering the general prize port (large value winning port) 602. As it becomes better, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S1953 that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value prize opening) 601 is included in the prize information command (S1955), and when it is determined that it is not included, this processing is ended as it is .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is included in the prize information command (S1955: Yes), normal time (a special symbol oddity, It means that the player is making a right strike despite the time saving state of the normal symbol and the normal state. In other words, it means that the player is playing a game by a game method in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 and there are few opportunities to receive the special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this case, the game is displayed by displaying a right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) prompting the player to aim at the first ball entrance 64 by left strike. It is possible to prevent the person from losing and to receive the lottery of the special symbol 1.

  If it is determined in the process of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 in the process of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included in the winning information command (S1957). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1957 that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), the special gaming state (big hit state) is not Nevertheless, it means that the sphere has flowed to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the player illegally causes the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 while the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and the present process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included. However, the display error command may be set also when the prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the entry into the out port 603b or 603c. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1812). This variation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2006: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, S2007 to S2013. The respective processes are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is directly changed as it is in the third symbol display device 81. It sets as a stop classification (S2008). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the short time state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and if it is determined not to be greater than 0 (ie, 0) (S2010: No), shift the processing to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S2012), the normal state (low) of the normal pattern to the normal pattern (low) Since this means switching to the probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued, so the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol There is no need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  The back image displayed in the short time state is specifically a back image on which the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is finished, the type is switched to the rear face type in which the right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the type of the jackpot. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished, it is switched to the back image for the normal state in which the right-handed navi is not displayed. In addition, when it becomes the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, the definite variation state of the special symbol continues until the jackpot becomes the next, so it is not changed from the back type where the right-handed navigation is displayed.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 After subtraction and updating (S2015), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the present process is ended. By the processes of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated regularly.

  In this embodiment, although the back surface type set by the definite variation state of a special symbol and the time shortening state of a normal symbol is made common, you may display a different back surface type, respectively. Thus, various effects can be realized. Further, the remaining short time period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the remaining short time.

  In the present embodiment, although the allowable time counter 223 h is updated in the variable display setting process (S 1812), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be configured to be updated in processing (sound editing / output processing, liquid crystal effect execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). As a result, the allowable time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2201) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2201. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2202, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S2103). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2103, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2104, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2105). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the simplified command determination process (FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. 50 (b) (see S2408) and the simplified display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2106, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S 2301), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern, not the power-on image. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table A table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2404). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is configured based on the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409). While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2404), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2407, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the “off” or “chance” is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2409) is executed to shift to the process of S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2502). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed Then (S2505), the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52A, details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 52 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2601 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2603. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2602. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2703), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703 and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2702.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S2508), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2802 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the opening command processing is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display number-of-rounds command has been received, there will be a lot of waiting between the end of the opening effect and the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effecting to the start of the ending effecting As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for round effect and ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S2510: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the round number command process (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2905), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55 (a), the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101) . Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type, the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on, and the rear surface image corresponding to other rear surface image types The determination flag is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3102. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102 At that time, specify the back image type to be displayed, and further specify the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236?) And the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S 2514 that there is no rear image change command (S 2514: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S 2516) For example (S2516: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  In the process of S2501 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 52 (a)) and the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 52 (b)) which are processing corresponding to each command, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3304).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S3401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  At S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S3502). As a result, if it is the End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set to 233 d is set to the clock counter 233 h (S 3504), the pointer 233 f is set to 1 for initialization (S 3505), and this processing is ended and displayed Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506) ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address of the end information is described. Since the drawing content is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3306 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S3315. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. The content is set to 233 d (S3317), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3321), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the opening command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 50B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished A process of setting a display data table defining display is set in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (b).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S3601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 is the resident video RAM 235 Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 59 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S 3702). In the process of S3702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3702 (S3702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Further, as a result of the process of S3701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3703, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3802 (S3802: No), the process of S3803 and S3804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3805: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3806 (S3806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the processing proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal) The start address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to the process of S3813.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S 3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233 i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3813 (S 3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405) (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 50B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning openings (the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state (big hit state) ), And is configured to open one of the winning openings according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning openings is configured as a winning opening in which a large number (15) of winning balls are paid out when the ball enters the ball. Further, two types of winning openings (a first specific winning opening 65a and a second specific winning opening 650a) are all provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. In this way, the ball can be made to enter even if any winning opening is opened only by striking the ball to the right of the gaming board 13 during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be made less dependent on the skill of the player, so that the player can enjoy playing the game with ease even if the player is a beginner.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning openings on the upstream side is disposed. The storage device 600 is configured such that when the player strikes the right, a part of the hit balls can flow into the inside, and the balls that flow into the different winning openings A plurality of flow paths are provided for flowing down. Specifically, the number of winning balls is compared with the guiding channel 606 for letting the balls flow down to the general winning opening (small winning hole) 601 having a relatively small number of winning balls (three winning balls). A guiding flow path 607 for letting the ball flow down to a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a large number (15 winning balls) is provided. Since the number of winning balls that can be obtained can be varied according to the type of the guiding flow path flowing down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the flow path of the ball flowing down to the player The type can be observed with interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, storage capable of closing the guiding channel 607 for causing the balls to flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls (15 winning balls). A valve 607 a is provided in the induction channel 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special game state (during the jackpot state), and is set to the closed state during the other game states. In addition, the gaming balls having flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged such that the respective guiding flow paths are easier to flow into the guiding flow path 607 than the guiding flow path 606 (FIG. 9 (see FIG. b) see). Therefore, in addition to the fact that winning balls can be obtained by entering a ball into the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a in the special gaming state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the guiding channel 607 A winning ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the selected general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, and the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, only by the player hitting the right. It is because a ball can be made to enter to either of and storage device 600. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and if the lottery result is a lottery result to win, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is opened. There exist some which provide a lot of award balls based on a ball entering a ball (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177). In this conventional game machine, in addition to a specific winning opening, a plurality of winning openings are provided, and by making a specific winning opening and another winning opening adjacent, a specific winning opening can be obtained. Some are configured so that a ball hit and aimed can enter any of the specific winning opening and the other winning openings. Here, it is common to control so as to close a specific winning opening with a certain number of balls entering the specific winning opening as one of the triggers, so the number of entering balls for a specific winning opening As the ball enters the other winning opening before the number becomes a specific number, the number of winning balls that the player can win at the hit increases. Therefore, the number of winning balls in a hit can be increased by bringing a specific winning opening and another winning opening adjacent to each other, so that the player's expectation for the hit can be further improved.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, even in situations other than wins, there may be occasional anomalous gaming methods in which winning balls are obtained by striking out the ball and aiming at another winning opening adjacent to a specific winning opening. The

  On the other hand, in the state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage flow path 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, since it is possible to store one ball in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide channel 607, the storage device 600 is firstly closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball which has flowed into the interior of the valve is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. And when a ball flows in to storage device 600 in the state where a ball was stored by the upper part of storage valve 607a, as a result of a flow-down direction changing by colliding with a stored ball, a ball goes to induction channel 602 It becomes easy to flow down (see FIG. 9 (b)). Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, fundamentally making the extraordinary game method of increasing the number of balls only by the payout of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 completely ceased In a state other than the gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to play a game expecting to be a big hit by making a lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if right-handed execution is performed in a gaming state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbol lottery to be made, and the payout based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 You can not increase the sphere by As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of hitting the right in the normal state, and to allow the player to play a game with the aim of becoming a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction channel 607 enters the general entrance 602 Although it is comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, a well-known Kroon device provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different winning balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. It is also good. As a result, even if the guiding flow channel 606 flows down, many winning balls can be obtained by entering the winning opening with a relatively large number of winning balls paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters any one winning opening. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage flow channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607 a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the guide flow channel 607. However, for example, the induction flow channel using an electromagnet or the like You may comprise so that a ball may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow passage 607, and in a state other than the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the electromagnet is magnetized by being energized. As a result, the ball first flowing into the guiding channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for embedding the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Thus, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the induction flow channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branching member 604 and the storage valve 607 a are eliminated). The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion immediately below and a general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 may be provided immediately below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, if there is a ball that has been drawn down by the electromagnet and stopped flowing down, the electromagnet stopped by the ball in contact with the electromagnet part is changed and the flowing direction is changed, whereby the electromagnet is not embedded. It may be configured to flow down the part and flow down in a direction different from the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Then, a general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 may be disposed below the portion of the guiding flow passage 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. Thus, the branching member 604 can be eliminated, and the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a was made into one ball, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that two or more spheres can be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide channel 607, and when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere may not be able to flow into the guide channel 607. By having a configuration in which the ball is not stored, even if the player strikes right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600.

  In the first embodiment, in particular, in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, or in the short time state of the normal symbol, the second ball inlet 640 is easily opened. In addition, in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the starting winning to the first entrance 64), It is easy to become a jackpot B that is advantageous to people. Therefore, when the jackpot is over, the player strikes the ball in an attempt to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the right. Therefore, for example, when the short period of time of the normal symbol is finished, the balls are stored in the storage device 600 with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been lost. On the other hand, the storage valve 607a is provided at the upper end of the guiding channel 607, and the ball is not stored in the storage device 600, thereby making it possible for the player to feel that the ball has been used up without waste. . Thus, the player can be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, 602 and the out ports 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the second ball entrance 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the right path (flow path) of the gaming board 13 is transferred to the inside of the storage device 600. May be Further, in this case, as the opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the drawing of the special symbol is executed 1000 times without becoming a big hit after the end of the big hit. May be

  In this way, when the drawing of the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the end of the big hit, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 by performing a right strike, so the special symbol 2 The lottery can be run. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 is five, but in the case of this modification, three payouts are made. It should be configured to be That is, since the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when hit to the right is 1 ball per 3 balls, it is possible to hit the right after the storage valve 607a is opened, It is possible to enter the second ball entry port 640 at a rate of one per three balls. That is, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. By configuring in this way, it is expected that the storage valve 607a will be opened, even if the drawing of the special symbol is repeated without making a big hit (so-called, even if a big hit has occurred) Can be done. Therefore, even if the period in which the jackpot does not occur is prolonged, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. In addition, by increasing the number of award balls paid out when entering the second entrance ball entrance 640 (for example, 10), the storage valve 607a is opened and thereafter the ball is hit only by hitting the right. It may be configured to increase. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further increase the merit in the case of being separated continuously 1000 times or more in the lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, I hope that it will be a big hit again with a small number of special symbol lottery times, if you continue to fall out of the special symbol lottery, to continue falling out of the special symbol lottery 1000 times or more continuously I can make you wish. Furthermore, after opening the storage valve 607a, the ball increases just by hitting the right, so by continuing to fall out of the drawing of the special symbol, the ball is held by the payout for entering the second ball entry port 640 It can be hoped that the condition that continues to increase will last for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to request the player to be a big hit of the special symbol or to keep losing the special symbol lottery depending on the number of times of drawing the special symbol, thereby providing the player with novel playability. Can.

  In the present embodiment, only one storage valve 604a is provided in the storage device 600, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide flow channel 606 may be branched in two directions, and one flow channel may be provided with a storage valve opened only during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). That is, on the downstream side of the guiding channel 606, a configuration similar to that of the guiding channels 606 and 607 and the branching member 604 may be further provided. Then, a general winning hole with a large number of winning balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and the number of winning balls is small in the flow path where the storage valve is not provided 3) General prize winning opening may be provided. By configuring in this way, a larger number of balls can be stored in storage device 600, so the special gaming state (big hit state) is started, and storage is performed by opening each storage valve. The balls that were being played can be simultaneously dropped to a general winning opening with a large number of winning balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Also in this configuration, as in the case where a plurality of storage valves are provided, it is possible to further increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, and the first variable winning device downstream of the storage device 600. The second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. However, the present invention is not limited to this arrangement, and any arrangement may be employed. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be disposed upstream of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), a ball hit to enter the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650 is the second ball entering first. There are cases where it becomes difficult to enter the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a, but the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a By arranging on the upstream side, it is possible to obtain winning balls more smoothly in the special game state (during the jackpot state).

  Further, by arranging the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a on the upstream side, by arranging the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a on the upstream side of the storage device 600, the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the ball enters the ball only at 600 and it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. Thus, each round in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) can be progressed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second specified ball entry port 640 are provided as entrances for lottery of special symbols, but either one may be eliminated. For example, the second ball entry port 640 may be eliminated, and the motorized role object 640 may be provided to the first ball entry port 64. As a result, the merits of striking the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) are reduced, so the anomaly for striking the storage device 600 Can be prevented (suppressed) more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when the ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters the ball), the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in which many prize balls are paid out. In addition to this, in one special gaming state (big hit state), the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It may be configured to In this way, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to obtaining the winning balls by winning to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, to obtain extra extra winning balls The player can be made aware of whether the Therefore, since it is possible to make more balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is possible to have a target of the number of entering balls. The number of winnings on the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 need not necessarily be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display may be provided separately. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, effects during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In this embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the first specified winning opening 65a (winning), and the ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a (winning) Although the number of award balls to be paid out based on the number and the number of award balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (winning) is the same number (15) Not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of a ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is given to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. May be configured to be less than the number of winning balls to be paid out based on entering a prize (winning) (for example, 10). As a result, as a result of the advancing direction of the ball being biased in the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600 alone, the disadvantage for the hole can be reduced.

  In addition, contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the common winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (winning), the first specified winning opening 65a, and the second specification It may be configured to be larger than the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a is 10, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the ball 602 (winning) may be fifteen. Thereby, the player can enjoy more benefits by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state), thereby further improving the interest of the player in the jackpot game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. However, the trigger for opening and closing the storage valve 607a Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state multiple times in the jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between rounds of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the number of award balls to be paid out in one jackpot is too large. That is, since it is possible to prevent variations in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one jackpot, it is possible to easily predict sales of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, it is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the interval period (that is, in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a are closed). A portion of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, even in the interval period, winning balls can be obtained by entering the balls into the general winning opening 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted even in the interval period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. Thereby, part of the balls remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, winning balls can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Furthermore, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is finished, and the storage valve 607a is closed after the fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) It may be configured to switch to the state. Thereby, part of the balls remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, the winning ball can be acquired by entering the ball into the general winning opening 602 after the ending effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the ball less likely to be wasted after the end effect.

  In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened in response to the setting of a gaming state different from the special gaming state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is changed when changing from the set gaming state to another gaming state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during a period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. Thus, in the special symbol oddity state, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to become a big hit B by right-handed, the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a large number of prize balls to be paid out Can be entered. Therefore, the probability variation state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit compared to the probability variation state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time saving state of the normal symbol occurs.

  Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the gaming state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the gaming state etc, of the storage valve 607a at any timing of the player. It may be configured to switch states. Thus, each player can play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her preference.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out port, a winning port may be provided in which a winning ball is paid out. In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out may be made different by entering the ball into each winning opening. More specifically, for example, the winning opening is provided with six winning openings instead of the out opening 603a, the winning opening is provided with ten winning balls instead of the out opening 603b, and the winning opening is provided instead of the out opening 603c. There may be 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the induction channel 606 or to which winning opening the ball enters the induction channel 607. In addition, a member capable of changing the flow-down direction of the ball such as a nail may be provided downstream of the guiding flow channel 606 or the guiding flow channel 607, and the winning opening on which any ball enters may be more random. . In this way, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters the winning opening. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry port where a ball can easily enter the ball by a store clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball-fall rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hole side.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in any state other than the special game state (big hit state). Although it was configured to do, it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. Also, it may be configured to switch based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. It is also good. When the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set in the open state (release state) by winning the lottery, the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 Because the player can enter the ball, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of winning more lotterys for the player. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, the jackpot (big hit B) that the second specified winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the ball exit 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type There is a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specified winning hole 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654, but either is displayed by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. It may be configured to indicate whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of the 1 round to 11 rounds of the jackpot, an arrangement may be made in which a friend of justice and a monster fight. And if the allies of justice win by 11 rounds, it will be notified that it is jackpot B, and when the allies of justice are defeated, it may be constituted so that it may be notified that it is jackpot A. That is, when the ally of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to a special variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the result of the presentation performed in the jackpot.

  It should be noted that there is a high probability that the allegations of justice have a high degree of expectation (the case of jackpot B is likely to be selected) with a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win. And may be provided. For example, justice allies attack enemies with their own special techniques, or they are configured to have a high expectation of winning if justice allies avoid enemy attacks, so that justice allies off attacks. It may be configured to be more likely to be defeated if the enemy attacks with a special move. This makes it possible to predict the outcome not only as a result of whether or not the justice allies wins, but also in the flow of presentation leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest for the player's jackpot game.

  In addition, the contents of the rendition performed by the 11th round are not limited to the rendition where the allies of justice and the monsters mentioned above fight, and can suggest the advantageous jackpot B and the jackpot A which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. It is sufficient if it is an aspect. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot B, and the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of eating gluttony and to be notified that it is a jackpot B if all the provided food is consumed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, a condition under which the storage valve 607a is opened, a merit when it is opened, and a disadvantage when the ball is hit in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) which demonstrates may be displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the right strike is performed in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, the right strike warning image Although it is configured to display (see FIG. 5B), it may be configured not to display a right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, in the case where the player is performing a right strike while the ball is not stored at the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the right strike warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. You may be configured not to display the reference. By setting the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, it becomes a big hit of a special symbol after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set in the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a The ball stored therein can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used for a jackpot game. Therefore, even if the ball is exhausted despite the jackpot, it is possible to play the jackpot game without borrowing a new ball.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state). It is configured that a winning ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the winning balls being paid out by causing the balls to enter the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, the ball to the storage device 600 The ball was configured to be paid out by entering the ball. As a result, in the jackpot, more prize balls are paid out, and the interest for the player's jackpot game is further improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Is configured to be difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and is configured to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball stored in the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, interference (contact) between the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 becomes possible. It was configured as. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored ball occurs, the flow-down direction of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. It was configured to change (in the direction of the induction channel 606). In this way, it is anomalous to try to increase holding balls without going through the jackpot by hitting the ball right aiming at winning the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal gaming state. It was configured so that the gaming method would not be realized fundamentally.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not the ball is stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the operation of the player. In addition, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the ball can flow down are provided, and the flow-down speed or approach angle of the ball flowed into the storage device 700, the adjustment condition of the nail, etc. The ball is configured to be able to flow into either flow path.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a winning opening that is easy to enter the ball when the ball is not stored (a state where the storage valve 704a is opened) and two flow paths that easily flow when the ball is stored by the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning openings respectively provided downstream of are configured such that the numbers of winning balls to be paid out are all different. That is, two types of winning openings that can be won when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704 a become a winning opening with a large number of winning balls to be paid out by one, and a winning opening with a small number of winning balls by the other. It is configured as follows. In addition, the winning opening where the ball can win in a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be intermediate between the two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the player can enter even a winning opening with a large number of winning balls and a small winning opening, and a state in which an average payout can be stably received by making the balls flow into the storage device 700 Can. Therefore, since it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is made to flow into the storage device 700 according to the preference of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entrance 64, 2 A point that the variable winning device 650 is abolished, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and a release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. Are performed, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially modified, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes Partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 A point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. Then, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is eliminated. The first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing left strike.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. In the storage device 700, the number of nails in the vicinity of the inlet thereof is smaller than that in the vicinity of the inlet of the storage device 600 according to the first embodiment, and the ratio of spheres inflowing when hit to the right is the storage device of the first embodiment It is configured to be less than 600 (e.g., 1 ball per 10 balls). The details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in the special symbol odd variation state or the normal symbol short time state (period in which the player does not lose even if right-handed) FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows the display content in the state where the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and in FIG. 63 (b), the release button 800 is pressed. The display content in the state (the state in which the storage valve 704 a is open) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated by the player), the boy's character 710 in the first embodiment (FIG. 5 (FIG. Instead of Ds2) in a), the letters "Open the gate! when the button is pressed" is displayed. By displaying this character, the storage valve 704 a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 can be set in the open state by pressing the release button 800 (button) to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, about the display content in display area other than small area | region Ds2, since it is the same as the definite variation state of the special symbol in 1st Embodiment, and the time saving state of a normal symbol, it abbreviate | omits about the detailed name description.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the character of "gate open" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guiding channel 707 for flowing down the sphere that has flowed in from the upper part, and on the downstream side of the guiding channel 707, three channels are provided. (The downstream of the induction channel 707 is branched in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing down the inflowing ball in the lower left direction of the front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing down in the front view lower direction, and the lower flow direction of the front view And an induction channel 708 for the purpose. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the downstream side of the induction channel 705, the ball is located to the right or left while flowing down the induction channel 705. Even by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flow direction of the ball can be corrected to the center. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction channel 705 can easily flow into the induction channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the induction channel 705.

  Downstream of the guiding channel 706, there are provided (for example, six) general winning openings (high value winning openings) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, in the downstream of the induction channel 704, the number of prize balls to be paid out compared to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is small (for example, three) general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 It is provided. Furthermore, as a ball entry port other than the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 702, the out-openings 703a to 703e are not paid out even if the ball enters the ball. It is provided. And, since the game ball which has flowed down the induction channel 708 enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e, when the ball flows down the induction channel 708 There is no merit for the player at all. A ball that has flowed down the induction channel 706 but did not enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Be done. In addition, the ball that has flowed down the induction channel 704 but did not enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703 b or the out opening 703 c. Be done. Even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration etc., these out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from being deposited below the storage device 700 and reliably discharge the balls. Can.

  A storage valve 704 a is provided in the guide channel 704. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a stores one ball in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a after closing the induction flow channel 704, thereby closing the guide flow channel 704. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player operating the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). It is done. In the state in which the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flowing direction is changed by an impact due to the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interfering with (in contact with) the stored ball. The change (switching) in the flowing direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (flowing direction) of the ball when the ball that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 flows down while the storage valve 704 a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), the case where a sphere that has interfered (contacted) with a stored sphere repels to the left in front view due to an impact of interference will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the sphere that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ball rebounds in the left direction of the front view, The ball flows into the induction channel 706 and flows down the induction channel 706. Here, since the general winning a prize opening (large value winning a prize opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction channel 706, a relatively large amount of balls can be entered into the general winning a prize winning opening (a high value winning a prize opening) 702. For example, six prize balls are paid out. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player if the ball rebounds to the right.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case where a sphere that has been stored in a state of interference (contact) with a stored sphere repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the sphere that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, it repels to the right in front view, The ball flows into the induction channel 708 and flows down the induction channel 708. Here, since the out ports (small value winning port) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the ball enters one of the out ports. That is, when the ball rebounds to the right in the front view, the winning balls are not paid out, so there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, in a state where the storage valve 704 a is closed, the number of winning balls (game value) obtained by the player fluctuates depending on the direction in which the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 rebounds. Therefore, in the case where the sphere flows into the storage device 700 (enters the sphere), it is expected that the sphere will be repelled in the left direction of the front view by the interference (contact) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. I can play a game. That is, since the flow-down direction (repulsion direction) of the ball which has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the direction in which the ball tends to repel also changes depending on the force of the ball, the angle of entering the storage device 700, and the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be devised to strike. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 which plays the game, select the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in consideration of the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the fun of finding the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation in the case where a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 in a state where the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. When the ball flows into the storage device 700, the ball first flows down the induction channel 705. Since a nail 709a and a nail 709b are respectively provided on the left and right of the guide channel 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is on the right or left while flowing down the guide channel 705. Even by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flow direction of the ball can be corrected to the center. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction flow channel 705 flows into the induction flow channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the induction flow channel 705.

  When the storage valve 704 a is open, the ball can flow down the induction channel 704, so the ball that has flowed into the induction channel 704 flows downstream to the induction channel 704 and the general winning opening (in the middle) Value winning entry) 701 to enter the ball. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out than the number of prize balls for entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, in a state in which the storage valve 704 a is opened, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow-down direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the induction channel 706 or the induction channel 708. That is, instead of being unable to enter the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a large number of prize balls obtained, the ball entering the out ports (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e There is no chance that you will not get a prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is made to enter the storage device 700, the winning ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can feel a sense of security.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. A state (a gambling state in which many winning balls may be obtained but may not be obtained) may be set. Also, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, it is possible to enter the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (although it is a small amount, it is stable It is possible to make it possible to obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Can play a game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. The release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control unit 113 is partially changed. There is a difference in points. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is disposed at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) at which the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that pressing is detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 to open the storage valve 704 a based on the pressing detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is set to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68A, the first contact type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described. Like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored.

  Note that, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, different from the first embodiment, regardless of whether it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the same for the value of the first hit classification counter C2 the same The jackpot type is associated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the jackpot C is defined in association with the range where the value of the first collision type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (FIG. 68 (a See 202b1)). In addition, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot C, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given as added value (transition to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol). Moreover, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the drawing of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

  On the other hand, the jackpot D is associated with the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first collision type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 2 in FIG. 68A). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Moreover, after the end of the jackpot D, a definite variation state of the special symbol of the special symbol is given as an added value (transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol). Moreover, the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type that has been won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is employed. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the defined contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability change counter 203i, the winning number counter 203j, the operation counter 203k, and the remaining balls provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation effective flag 203o, the probability variation effective timer 203p, and the discharged number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to a special variation of the special symbol after the big hit in the second specified winning device 650. That is, in this embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the gaming state to be set at the end of the jackpot is determined in advance, and whether or not to shift to the special symbol state variation during special gaming state (during jackpot state) Since the determination is not performed, it is not necessary to use the above-described configurations in the present embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the release flag 203s is provided in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. In the release flag 203s, it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (a state where the ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). ?) Is a flag indicating The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the storage valve 704a is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, referring back to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, the number-of-winnings counter 223 j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment is eliminated, and a storage state flag 223 k and an outflow time counter 223 k are added. There is.

  The storage state flag 223 k is a flag indicating whether the storage valve 704 a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed, and a sphere can be stored at the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage state flag 223 k is off, the storage valve 704 a is set to the open (released) state, which indicates that the sphere can flow down the guiding channel 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main controller 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The flow-down time counter 223 k is a ball entry port (general winning opening 701, general winning combination) in which the ball having flowed into the induction channel 704, induction channel 706, or induction channel 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a. It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out-port 703d, or the out-port 703e) (ball-sinking time). By counting the ball swelling period, the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value opening When the ball enters the winning opening) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball entering is normal. Whenever the storage state command is received from main controller 110, the flow-down time counter 233k sets a counter value corresponding to 1 second (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Also, each time the main processing (see FIG. 42) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, one is subtracted.

  In the present embodiment, with the storage valve 704 a closed, a ball enters a general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704 a or the storage valve 704 a is opened. When the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (FIG. b) Reference is configured to be displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction channel 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will switch to the closed state and then the ball will enter the general winning opening There is a case to enter the winning opening) 701. Similarly, if the ball flows into the induction channel 706 or the induction channel 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the balls generally change after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. There are cases where the player enters a winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and an out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (do not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow-down time counter 233k is performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value has elapsed, the ball has a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When entering the out slot (small value winning opening) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed).

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 69) are changed from the first embodiment. In the following, only the various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed descriptions of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As in the first embodiment, in the main processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 70) is substituted for the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) with respect to the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is different in that Moreover, it is different also in the point by which storage control processing (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is performed after completion | finish of 2nd symbol display update processing (S1007). Further, it is also different in that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or 1) A process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (S1021), in each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is eliminated. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether it is the special game state (big hit state) or not Is switched.

  In the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a The release is set (S1121), the number-of-rounds command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123) ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have won after releasing.

  If it is determined in the process of S1123 that the closing condition for the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is selected. After closing (S1124), the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state) is finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set first (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probable variation jackpot) (S1126), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not D (ie, the jackpot C) (S1126: No), 100 is set to the value of the hour / minute counter 203r (S1127), and this processing ends. By setting 100 to the hour and hour counter 203r, it is possible to set the time for the normal symbol to a short period until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1126 that the present jackpot is a jackpot D (probable variation jackpot), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in order to give a probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( S1128), this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S1109, when it is not the start timing of the ending (S1109: No), this process is ended. That is, the prize winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of this embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening opened in the jackpot is provided. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the big hit is predetermined according to the big hit type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). The storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). If it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (storage device 700). Since it means that the state in which the ball can be stored is released), it is next determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the depression detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), the reservoir valve 704a is kept open. This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (ie, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), for the storage device to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is set to off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the closing of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closing state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state demand set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, to the display control device 114, a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the closed state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the character "open gate when the button is pressed!" Is displayed on the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which balls can be stored in the storage device 700 is set) Then, it is determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the depression detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (ie, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. In order to save, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. It sets to (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a is set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character "open in gate" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing the storage control process, it is possible to set the opening or closing of the storage valve 704 a in accordance with the operation status of the release button 800. Thus, by storing the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which the ball enters the ball and a state in which the ball entering (entering) the storage device 700 flows down toward the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same process as each process of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment is performed. Each is executed.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not a malfunction such as a failure occurs in the storage valve 704a Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a failure occurs is executed (S1921), and this process ends.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), then whether or not the storage state command is received is It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is also performed by setting a rear surface image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and (b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update. Update the contents.

  When the process of S1923 ends, a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the flow-down time counter 2231 (S1924), and the process ends. The presence or absence of a malfunction can be accurately determined in the storage valve 704a by using the ball-sinking time set for the flow-down time counter 223l. When it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 displays the state of the storage valve 704a on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command or the closing state command. A command for causing the display control unit 114 to be set can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, warning processing (S1921) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a failure such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and performing a warning when a failure occurs.

  In the warning process (S1921), it is first determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). If it is on (S4101: Yes), then whether the value of the flow-down time counter 2231 is 0 It is determined whether or not (S4102). Then, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the flashing period has elapsed. Therefore, storage time notification processing for reporting a failure in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4103), and this processing is ended. Also, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the ball is currently in a flush period associated with the storage valve 704a being closed. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, the details of the storage notification processing (S4103) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is also set in the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704 a and enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701. This means that although the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the storage valve 704a is not normally closed, so a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202) , End this process.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a defect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the store clerk in the hall can easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4101 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (ie, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104) If it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the flashing period has elapsed. Therefore, the release notification process for notifying a defect in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4105), and the present process is ended. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In this release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is out. It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entrance to the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entrance to the out mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is accepted. If no winning information is included (S4302: No), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the out slot (small value winning prize port) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. When the prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out mouth (small value prize hole) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the induction channel 704, so the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or out The ball enters the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e because there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a defect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the store clerk in the hall can easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing the balls therein. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 704, 706, 708) in its interior, and is configured to allow the balls to flow down to different ball entrances. Further, a storage valve 704 a capable of closing the flow path is provided in the induction flow path 704. When the induction channel 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one sphere can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

  In addition, in a state where the storage valve 704 a is opened, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction channel 704 (compare to the induction channel 706 and the induction channel 708, to the induction channel 704). Since the ball is configured to be more likely to flow in, the ball can be made to enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the induction flow channel 704. Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the winning balls based on the entry of the balls into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701.

  On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball is stored in the upper part, the guiding flow path 706, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) the stored ball. Or repel in either direction of the induction channel 708. That is, any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a large number of prize balls to be paid out or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703 d or 703 e in which the prize balls are not paid out Enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hit to a game board. Among these conventional game machines, there are some which can release a held ball to the game board by the operation of the player and enter a predetermined winning opening provided in the direction of movement ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest, only by causing the balls released using the holding device to enter the predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. A state (a gambling state in which many winning balls may be obtained but may not be obtained) may be set. Also, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, it is possible to enter the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (although it is a small amount, it is stable It is possible to make it possible to obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Can play a game. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, switching of the state of the storage valve 704a can be performed at any timing of the player by the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. As a result, it is possible to cause each player to start playing the game in a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable to his / her preference. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704 a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to perform lottery for whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. May be

  Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, depending on the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, if it is easy for the ball to enter the out-port (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed, A game can be played in expectation of the valve 704a being opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the lottery continues to be lost. It is possible to play the game in anticipation that the storage valve 704a continues to be closed. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow paths through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708, but the invention is not limited thereto. More flow paths and a winning opening may be provided. Also, more variations may be given to the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening. Thereby, when the storage valve 704a is closed, it is possible to increase the randomness of the number of winning balls that can be acquired, so the player is more interested in the flow direction of the ball entering the storage device 700. It can be done.

  Moreover, when the storage valve 704a is open, a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow may be provided. And when flowing down each flow path, you may provide the ball inlet which a different number of award balls are paid out, respectively. Thereby, even if the storage valve 704a is opened, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the flow-down direction of the ball entering the storage device 700 for the player Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, the sphere can be easily introduced into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specified winning opening 65a is provided as a winning opening opened in the special gaming state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704 a is opened only while the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. As a result, there is no need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704 a open. In addition, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. By configuring in this manner, since it is sufficient to operate the release button 800 only when switching the state, it is possible to reduce the number of operations performed by the player. Also, contrary to the release button 800, operation means may be provided in which the storage valve 704a is closed by operating. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to allow each player to select a game characteristic that matches his or her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters for the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a photographed image in a state where the storage valve 704a is opened or a photographed image in a closed state may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704 a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed in front of the third symbol. Further, the aspect of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the aspect of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closing state command is received. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) is displayed which describes the condition under which the storage valve 704a is opened and the merits and demerits when the storage valve 704a is opened. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 so that the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a by left hitting, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, as in the first embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, it is possible to flow the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting the right in the special game state (big hit state), so the winning balls in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Thus, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704 a and the sphere newly introduced to the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with each other, the flow path where the newly introduced sphere flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 being divided into the induction channel 706 and the induction channel 708 is substantially the same. Although it comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is increased (for example, 1.5 times the diameter of the ball), and the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a takes a position closer to the front or right It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is disposed on the upper side of the storage valve 704 a in the left side in a front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right in the front view, so the ball is likely to flow down the guiding channel 708. As described above, since the out-ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the player can not obtain the winning balls (which is disadvantageous for the player) . On the other hand, when the ball is disposed on the upper side of the storage valve 704a in the front view to the right, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left in front view, so the ball is likely to flow down the guiding channel 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding channel 708, the player can obtain a relatively large number of winning balls (which is advantageous for the player) ). In this manner, the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a can create an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player, so that the storage valve 704a is closed when the storage valve 704a is closed. Can be made aware of the arrangement of the balls stored at the top of the Therefore, if the arrangement of the balls is an adverse arrangement (that is, if the balls are stored on the left side in the front view), the storage valve 704 a may be opened (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800 it can. Also, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, the balls are stored to the right in the front view), the player can be made to think that he wants to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, since it is possible to give fun to determine whether or not the release button 800 is pressed according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Modification of First Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the state (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening 650a and the state (open or closed) of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 are mutually independent. And in the bonus game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is controlled to be always in the open state, while the second specified winning opening 650a is for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It is configured to be set to the open state only in the open period defined for each jackpot type shown in FIG. Further, two types of flow paths (induction flow path 652 and induction flow path 653) are provided in the second variable winning device 650, and induction is performed only when the ball flows down the induction flow path 652 The ball is configured to be able to enter into a ball socket 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a during the big hit, it is configured so that it does not shift to the special symbol of the definite variation state after the big hit if the ball does not flow down the induction channel 652 The

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the second specified winning opening 650a is stored by using the slide member 900 in place of the member for opening and closing the second specified winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, the opening / closing operation of the second specified winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specified winning opening 650a is opened, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened, and when the second specified winning opening 650a is closed, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602). ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this manner, the second specified winning hole 650a, the general winning hole 602 (ie, the winning opening opened in the jackpot by the slide member 900), both winning jack for winning balls in the jackpot It can be treated as

  In addition, only the guide channel 652 continuing to the probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the channel switching valve 650d, the guide channel 653, and the normal ball inlet 655. Is abolished. That is, if it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a, it is configured to shift to the special symbol state of probability variation after the end of the jackpot. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening to be opened in the 12th round according to the jackpot type. That is, the jackpot (V route opening jackpot) in which the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to the open state in the 12th round, and the first specification in all rounds of the jackpot A jackpot (V route closed jackpot) in which the winning opening 65a is set to an open state (the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) is provided It is done.

  Along with the change from the first embodiment, the termination condition of each round of the jackpot is also changed. Specifically, in 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds of the jackpot, the ball entered the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 Is changed to 10 in total or 30 seconds after the start of the round, the round game is over (the first specified winning opening 65a is closed). In addition, in the 12th round, the number of balls entering the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 will be 10 in total, or Is changed so that the round game is ended (the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the start of.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that it is a member for switching the state of the second specified winning opening 650a (the closing portion 910) The point that the member (ball storage part 920) for switching the state of the guiding channel 607 is constituted by one member (slide member 900), and the ball is thrown out when the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. The number of winning balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine in the first embodiment is a partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 0 is a point that has been changed from. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of V route opening big hit (big hit F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when it comes to 12 rounds of V route open jackpot (big hit F), the characters “ROUND12” are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specified winning opening 650a has been opened is formed at the upper center of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In the display area 717, the characters "CHANCE !!" and the characters "during a definite change route opening !!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game is to shift to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the jackpot by causing the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a. The other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents (see FIG. 6A) displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the downstream structure of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. Further, a member (closing portion 910) for opening or closing the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a member (ball storage portion 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 Are arranged in a straight line. Although the details will be described later, this is because the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both parts of the slide member.

  Further, at the inlet of the storage device 600, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided. A store clerk in the hall can adjust, for example, the rate of inflow of balls into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before opening the hall. By changing the proportion of balls flowing into the storage device 600, the number of balls entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 can be varied in the 12th round of the big hit it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball shot by the right hitting is more likely to flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be won by the player at the big hit. Therefore, since the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the interest for the player's game can be improved.

  Conversely, when it is made difficult for the balls to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specified winning hole 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600, and the second The ball reaching the specific winning hole 650a can be increased. Thus, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it becomes easy to enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round, when it becomes a big hit F, it can be made easy to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the possibility that jackpots will continue in a short period is high, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the structure for adjusting the ease of ball | bowl inflow to the storage apparatus 600 (easiness to enter the ball to the 2nd specific winning opening 650a) is not restricted to a nail. For example, a wind turbine may be provided at the inlet of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be able to slide and displace to the back side or the front side in a front view with respect to the game board 13, and the second specification is made by sliding to a front side in the front view. The winning opening 650a and the induction channel 607 can be closed respectively. On the other hand, by slidingly displacing the slide member 900 with respect to the game board 13 to the back side in a front view, the second specified winning opening 650a and the guiding flow path 607 can be opened.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a view from above of the game board 13 when the second specified winning opening 650a and the induction channel 607 are closed by the slide member 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view from above of the game board 13 when the second specified winning opening 650a and the guiding channel 607 are opened respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closure portion 910 and a spherical storage portion 920 project from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930 (approximately “ It has a "U-shaped" shape. The closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are projected to the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 through the openings 940 a and 940 b respectively opened in the base plate 60. can do.

  In a state in which the slide member 900 is slidingly displaced to the front side of the front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specified winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so the ball is second variable It will not be possible to enter the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guiding channel 607 is closed by the ball reservoir 920, the ball can be made to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slidingly displaced to the back side of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guiding channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball right, the ball to the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607, or the second specified winning hole 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in the present modification, switching of the state of the second specified winning opening 650a and switching of the state of the guiding flow passage 607 can be realized by only the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specified winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game, such as lottery of special symbols, determination of fluctuation time, etc., if processing speed is reduced due to increase of processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by the introduction of the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the ball enters the second specified winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the definite variation ball inlet 654. Then, as a jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specified winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specified winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, big hit E (V route closed big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specified winning opening 65a continues for a predetermined time (30 seconds), or the ball is It is a jackpot that is open until 10 balls enter the ball. That is, since the ball can not be inserted into the ball entry ball 654 disposed inside the second variable winning device 650 in the special gaming state (big hit state), the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit ends. It is granted once.

  On the other hand, the big hit F (V route open big hit) is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). The jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and a second specified winning opening 650a and a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are given a predetermined time (30 seconds) in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. The ball is released until the ball enters 10 balls), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specified winning opening 650a continues for a predetermined time (30 seconds) or the ball enters 10 balls. It is a jackpot that is open until the ball. In jackpot F, the second specified winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if it is possible to enter the ball into the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round, a definite variation of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Is granted. On the other hand, as a result of the ball entering only the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 despite the fact that the player did not hit the right in the 12th round or did the right hitting, the ball was moved to the second specified winning opening 650a. When 12 rounds are finished without entering the ball, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the big hit F.

<About Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 34) are changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment, a big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed. ing. In the following, only the description of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be given, and the detailed description of the other processes which are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

  S1101, S1102, S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment in the respective processes of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 of the jackpot control process 3. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, the same processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), each process of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which has been executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, is eliminated.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) Instead of this, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the states (opened state or closed state) of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. Processing is performed.
Also, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in the present modification, if it is determined to be the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the current jackpot type is the jackpot F (V route open It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1211).

  If it is determined that the jackpot F is not the jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that it is the jackpot E in which the first specified winning opening (first jackpot opening) 65a is opened in all rounds of jackpot. The opening of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot F in the process of S1211 (S1211: Yes), it is a jackpot type that the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a opens only in the 12th round, the second specification The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing portion 910 closing the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 closing the guiding channel 607 of the lottery apparatus 600. (The part of the slide member 900), and the closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 slide in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a by the process of S1203, the guiding channel 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the process of S1203, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a And a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) to notify the voice lamp control device 114 that the induction channel 607 is set to the open state (release state) (S1212) , And moves the process to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a chance for the player to shift to the special symbol oddity state.

  The transition to the special symbol oddity state is likely to become a big hit again in a short period after the big hit ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can more seriously aim at the second specified winning opening 650a to hit the ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere operation for obtaining the prize ball, and enjoy the game in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state).

  As described above, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning hole (second large opening) 650a among the balls hit to the right is the nails 921a, 921b (provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600) It can be made variable by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in the front view, or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in the front view (open the nail), the right-handed ball flows more into the storage device 600. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, as the nails 921a and 921b are opened, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Also, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 without entering the ball into the second specified winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end . Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state. In addition, when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a larger number of winning balls paid out compared to the second specified winning opening 650a. (Refer FIG.9 (b)). As a result, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls, and the interest for the player's jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, in the 1st to 11th rounds, the player aims at the first specified winning opening 65a and strikes the right, so the player is disposed downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 The ball also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, by the start of the twelfth round, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920. Therefore, 12 rounds are started, and when slide member 900 is slide-displaced and the upper part of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 is the general winning opening (Large value winning opening) flows down to 602. As a result, of the balls hit substantially in the 12th round, the balls are directed to the second specified winning hole 650a by the time the nine balls enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602. If it is not possible to enter the ball, the 12th round will end.

  On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921 a and the nail 921 b to approach each other (closing the nail), the ball hit by the right becomes difficult to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650 becomes relatively high, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the special symbol oddity state after the big hit end. As a result, since it becomes easy to become a big hit again in a short period after the end of the big hit F, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this way, by changing the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed, the second ball entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is obtained. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability of the jackpot F when the store clerk in the hall adjusts the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to enter the special winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game characteristic which is easy to shift to the special symbol state. It is easy to obtain many prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch to the game characteristic which is hard to shift to the special symbol oddity state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the sales policy of the hall.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. Instead of), winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing a winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the present modification. Of the winning processing 2 (S1122), the processing of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are respectively identical to the processing of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment Processing is performed.

  Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specification When it is determined that the total number of balls entered to the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any winning opening (first specified winning opening (first large opening)) 65a which has been opened, or the second specification A winning opening closing process for setting the closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning hole closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing processing (S1431) is processing for setting the closing of the winning opening when the closing condition of the winning opening is established in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the 12th round (S4401). And if it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the winning opening currently open is the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a, so the first specified winning opening (first (1 large open port) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the present is the 12th round (S4401), the winning opening opened according to the jackpot type is a different round, so the present jackpot is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether or not the open jackpot) (S4403). When it is determined that the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) is not (that is, it is jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) (S4403: No), the currently open winning opening is the first specified winning opening ( Since it means that it is the first large opening port) 650a, the processing is shifted to S4402 to set the closing of the first specified winning opening (first large opening port) 65a (S4402), and this processing finish.

  In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the present jackpot is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. This means that the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently being opened. Therefore, in this case, the closing of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is set (S4404), and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed, the storage state command corresponding to the closing state (storage state) is set ( S4405), this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the chance to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state has ended.

  By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), it is possible to accurately close the winning opening that has been opened.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the process contents of the command determination process are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from main controller 110 at the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process The processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in the present modification, instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment, an error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed. The error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the above-described error notification process 2 (S1971). Of the error notification processing 2 (S1971), in the processing of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process (FIG. Instead of the reference), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is ended. As in the case of the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for giving a notification when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit. It is.

  Next, the above-described hit notification processing 2 (S1981) will be described with reference to FIG. In hit notification processing 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). If it is determined in the process of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0 If not (S1992), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1992 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball discharge period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning entry (large value winning entry) 602 is included in the prize information command (S1993).

  If it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning entry (large value winning entry) 602 is not included (S1993: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set in the closed state (storage state) Despite this, it means that the ball has flowed downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (is off) (S1991: No), it is then determined whether the value of the flow time counter 2231 is 0 (S1995) ). Then, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then, the general winning prize entry (small value winning prize entry) 601 is entered in the received prize information command. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the process of S1996, when the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state) It means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite the fact that the ball and the brushing period have passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify of the failure of the storage valve 607a.

  By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be reported promptly, so that the malfunction can be resolved quickly.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the guiding channel in the storage device 600. The opening and closing operation of 607 can be performed simultaneously. That is, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a winning ball during a big hit.

  Since switching of the state of the second specified winning hole 650a and switching of the state of the guiding channel 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, as in the first embodiment, the second specification The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game, such as lottery of special symbols, determination of fluctuation time, etc., if processing speed is reduced due to increase of processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by the introduction of the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  Further, in the present modification, only the positive insertion ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the positive insertion ball opening 654. It is configured to be a ball. Thereby, if the ball can be made to enter the second specified winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple game characteristic of transitioning to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the jackpot. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to easily determine whether or not to shift to a definite variation state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to provide a fun to enjoy even for beginners. In addition, since the flow path switching valve 650 d provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment, the induction flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 is Structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this modification, the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 among the right-handed balls is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is lottery whether or not to win based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and whether or not to shift to probability fluctuation state separately during the win There is something to draw. In this way, it is suppressed that the hit is a mere work to get a lot of balls, and it is possible to play the hit game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest for the player's game I am trying to

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which the game ball can be entered only during a hit, and the probability fluctuation state after hit by having the game ball enter the predetermined area. There is one that shifts to (for example, JP-A-2003-180999).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, the percentage of game balls entering a predetermined area during a hit is set in advance for each model, so to vary the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, the hall The side had to introduce a different model. That is, in the conventional game machine, there is no freedom in the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, and it is difficult to flexibly respond to different business policies for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been desired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed can be easily changed according to the adjustment of the nails 921a, 921b It is composed of This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the second ball entrance 650 a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability of the jackpot F when the store clerk in the hall adjusts the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to enter the special winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with game characteristics that are easy to shift to the special symbol state. It is possible to switch to game characteristics that are difficult to shift to a definite variation state of a symbol. Therefore, since the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the sales policy of the hall, the versatility can be improved.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the open time to 10 seconds, it is possible to more easily enter the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a. As a result, it is easy to shift to a definite variation state of the special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Also, the open time may be set to, for example, 2 seconds. The pachinko machine 10 has various ways of hitting to make the ball enter the second specified winning hole 650a in a limited time by shortening the opening time, and the pachinko machine 10 with the nails 921a and 921b more closed. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to heat the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the inlet of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specified winning hole 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be varied by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for changing the proportion of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, a winning opening may be provided which simply pays out the prize ball by entering the out port or a ball. Then, the second specified winning opening 650a may be configured such that the open / close state is switched by a single member. Even if configured in this way, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a can be changed by changing the ease of entering the out-port or the winning opening. It can be done. Further, the structure can be simplified by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the ease of entering the storage device 600 does not have to be adjustable. That is, in place of the nails 921a and 921b, a cylindrical member fixed to the board may be provided. This makes it impossible to adjust on the hole side whether or not the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. Even if you don't ball, you can prevent the tip of the discouragement from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from distrusting the hall.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. In this way, it can be determined early whether or not to shift to the special symbol's probability change state, so it is possible to play the game with ease in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). In addition, the second specified winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, since it is not determined until the final round, 15 rounds, whether or not the transition to the special variation state of the special symbol is made, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the special variation state of the special symbol longer. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot game of the player. Further, for example, when the jackpot becomes F, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened at the 12th round and the 13th round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (large value winning hole) 602 in the 12th round, and the ball storage portion in the 13th round There can be no sphere at the top of 920. Therefore, the chance of entering the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a can be increased.

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but this is not a limitation, and a plurality of spheres can be stored, For example, four balls may be stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920. In this case, 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602 after changing the ending condition of the 12 rounds. It may be configured to In the 1 to 11 rounds of the jackpot, a game is performed in an attempt to bring the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a by hitting the right, so in many cases the ball is in the upper part of the reservoir 920 before the start of the 12 rounds. The upper limit number (4) is stored. That is, 12 rounds are started, and four stored balls flow simultaneously into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by opening the ball storage portion 920, so immediately after the start of the 12 rounds 4 balls enter the specified winning opening (the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are finished by one more ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specified winning opening) Since the player enters the state of entering the general winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, the opportunity to enter the second specified winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more tense and play 12 rounds of games. In addition, in the 1 to 11 rounds of the jackpot, while wishing that the ball does not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the upper limit number of balls stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920 is four) 12 It is possible to play a jackpot game while wishing to reach a round. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game while making the player feel tense even during the jackpot, it is prevented (suppressed) that the jackpot is just like the work for obtaining the prize ball, and the player's jackpot game Can improve the interest for

  It should be noted that the number of balls entering the specific winning combination that is the end condition of the 12 rounds and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the ending condition of the 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920. This makes it possible to play the game by strongly wishing that the ball is not stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. Also, conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage portion 920 may be reduced. Thereby, even if the upper limit number of balls are stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 by the start of 12 rounds, giving the opportunity to enter the balls into the second specified winning opening 650a in 12 rounds multiple times Can. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the special variation of the special symbol, so it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In this modification, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage portion 920 is opened, but the jackpot during the jackpot is limited to this is not. For example, you may be comprised so that it may be alert | reported whether it is big hit E or big hit F according to the result of the presentation performed by the 11th round of big hit. More specifically, for example, in each round of 1 round to 11 rounds, an effect may be performed in which a friend of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the allies of justice win by 11 rounds, it may be notified that the jackpot is F, and if the allies of justice are defeated, the jackpot E may be notified. That is, since the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round when the allies of justice win, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the special variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the result of the presentation performed in the jackpot.

  It should be noted that there is a high probability that the allegations of justice have a high degree of expectation (the case of jackpot F is high) and the allies of justice are defeated (case of jackpot E). And may be provided. For example, justice allies attack enemies with their own special techniques, or they are configured to have a high expectation of winning if justice allies avoid enemy attacks, so that justice allies off attacks. It may be configured to be more likely to be defeated if the enemy attacks with a special move. This makes it possible to predict the outcome not only as a result of whether or not the justice allies wins, but also in the flow of presentation leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest for the player's jackpot game.

  In addition, the contents of the rendition performed by the 11th round are not limited to the rendition where the allies of justice and the monster fight as described above, and can suggest the advantageous jackpot F and the jackpot E which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F It is sufficient if it is an aspect. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if it is possible to find the treasure by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that the jackpot is F, or the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of eating gluttony and to be notified that it is a jackpot F if all the provided food is consumed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, a condition under which the storage valve 607a is opened, a merit when it is opened, and a disadvantage when the ball is hit in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) which demonstrates may be displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a winning ball for the big hit, but the general winning opening (high value The winning opening) 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. In other words, each round of the big hit ends when 10 balls or more enter the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a as an end condition of each round of the big hit (generally at the end of the round) The number of balls entering the winning opening 602 may not be involved. As a result, as the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, it becomes more profitable for the player, so it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a, and the storage device 600 can be formed. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so as to make it difficult for the ball to flow in, the ball is easily entered into the second specified winning hole 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a, 921b, it was configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special symbol of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, but change the ratio of transition to the special symbol of the definite pattern The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of making the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, the second variable prize device 650 is provided with a probability change ball inlet 654 and a normal ball inlet 655 as in the first embodiment. It is good also as composition. The store clerk in the hall may adjust the ratio in which the balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 can be distributed to the probability change ball inlet 654 and the normal ball inlet 655. More specifically, for example, after being replaced with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment as the second variable winning device 650 in this modification, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched to Abolish the axis 650e. Then, for example, a nail may be hit at a branch position between the induction flow channel 652 and the induction flow channel 653 (that is, above the place where the switching shaft 650 e is provided in the first embodiment). The position where the nail is to be hit may be, for example, a distance about the radius of the ball from the place where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). That is, it may be a position where the balls flowing down the induction channel 651 can come in contact (collision), and the position where the sphere can flow down to the induction channel 652 and the induction channel 653. By configuring in this way, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the gaming ball flowing down the guiding channel 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side surface of the nail Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled in the left direction of the front view. Therefore, the balls are more likely to flow into the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the balls can be easily entered into the probability change ball inlet 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make the special symbol in a definite variation state after the end of the jackpot. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the gaming ball having flowed down the guiding channel 651 is likely to contact (collide) with the right side surface of the nail, so the ball is frontal. It is likely to be repelled in the right direction. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guide channel 653 provided on the left side of the front view on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650, so the ball can easily enter the ball ball 654 with certainty. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in the definite variation state after the end of the big hit. As described above, by making it possible to adjust the ease of entering the ball ball 654, the spec of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, the game characteristic corresponding to the sales policy of each hall can be provided.

  Also, as another specific example configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special symbol state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a, 921b in this modification, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is in the open state There may be provided a variable member that switches between the closed state and the closed state. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle consisting of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set in the open state and the period set in the closed state The ratio may be configured to allow the holes to be adjusted. More specifically, for example, operation means capable of setting in a plurality of states such as dip switches is provided. Then, for example, when the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set in the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the gaming ball is set to be most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the switch state indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set in the closed state. That is, there is no ball flowing into the storage device 600 at the jackpot, and the state is set such that it is most likely to flow into the second specified winning opening 650a. When the dip switch is in the other state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which it is closed may be extended as it goes from (00000000B) to (11111111B). That is, the ball may easily enter the second specified winning opening 650a as it travels to (11111111B), and may be configured to be more likely to set the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. When configured in this way, a hall that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a gaming machine that is unlikely to become a special symbol indeterminate state, for example, the variable member has a closed state of 0.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds The setting of the dip switch may be adjusted to repeat the open state. Conversely, a hall that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game characteristic gaming machine that is likely to become a special symbol indeterminate state, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state of 2.5 seconds and an open state of 0.5 seconds Adjust the dip switch settings to. Thus, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied in accordance with the sales policy of the hall, so that highly versatile game characteristics corresponding to the sales policy of each hall can be provided.

Modification of Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to close the guiding flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 by the storage valve 704a, and one sphere can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. And, in a state where the balls are stored, it is easy for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 with many winning balls to be paid out, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball is configured to easily enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 having a small number of winning balls to be paid out. The storage valve 704 a is basically set in the closed state, and is configured to be in the open state when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e There is a possibility that many balls can be obtained, but it becomes a gambling state where a winning ball may not be obtained), and if the storage valve 704a is in the open state, the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are The player can enter the mouth (medium-value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but can stably obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Was configured to be able to play a game.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball entry port where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball (it becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 702 or enters the out port depending on the arrangement of the stored balls Is it easy to change the ball? That is, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it is easily recognized whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls. It is configured to be able to.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration only in that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the second embodiment It is identical to the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, a storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in the present modification, up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. The details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in the present modification, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the lower right direction in a front view. For this reason, when the storage valve 704a is closed, most of the spheres that first flowed into the induction channel 704 are stopped at the right side of the induction channel 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704 is longer than that in the second embodiment. Also, the induction channel 704 does not have a width sufficient to align two balls in a row. For this reason, when one sphere is stored rightward in the guide channel 704 and another sphere flows into the guide channel 704, in many cases, it is newly added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. Spheres are stored (new spheres are stored between the previously stored spheres and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide channel 704).

  In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the state in which the first stored sphere is to the right and the second stored sphere is stored to the left), the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 thereafter are It is easy to collide with the right side of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to an impact due to a collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guiding channel 708, and enters the out port (small value winning hole) 703d, 703e.

  As described above, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value winning hole) 703d and 703e. The player can not obtain a winning ball because it will ball. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player.

  A ball entry sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guiding channel 704, for detecting a ball when a ball is present on the front side of the front view. The ball placement sensor 704b can determine the arrangement of the balls. More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 704b for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. An image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800 when it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. ) Can be displayed. Thus, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 can easily enter the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example in the case where two balls are stored will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the gaming balls that first flowed into the guiding channel 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stored to the left with respect to the guiding channel 704, and the second guiding channel is the second. The sphere that has flowed into 704 is stored rightward with respect to the induction channel 704. In the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is easy for the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 thereafter to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the flow-down direction of the ball collided (contacted) with the stored ball is likely to change to the left, so it flows down the induction channel 706 and the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (six payouts) It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, when the storage state is as shown in FIG. 88, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 by flowing the ball into the storage device 700. This is an advantageous condition for a player who can expect to obtain a winning ball every time a ball flows in.

  Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is difficult to realize as compared to the storage state shown in FIG. For example, when the storage valve 704 a is closed, two spheres flow into the induction channel 704 almost simultaneously, or the sphere that first reaches the storage valve 704 a becomes the reservoir valve 704 a or the induction channel 704. This may be realized, for example, when the second sphere flows into the guiding channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

  Many of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but even in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. . That is, the balls can be stored in the storage device 700 in anticipation of resetting the storage state and achieving the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of setting the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, the player can be given a sense of achievement, and the ball is kept entering the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 for an award. You can feel the expectation for being able to get many balls.

  Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement deviates from the ball entering sensor 704b (the arrangement is such that the ball does not shield the front side of the ball entering sensor 704b). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, it is possible to continue the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. The suggestion display image is an image shown in FIG. 87 when it is determined that the arrangement disadvantageous to the player is continuous for a predetermined time (one minute). More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected for one minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and a suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, characters of “under adverse arrangement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 with respect to the player is an arrangement that is disadvantageous for the player (the arrangement in which the balls having flowed into the storage device 700 are guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). It can be made to recognize. In addition, below the character "due to disadvantageous arrangement", the character "press the button to reset the arrangement !!" is displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated if the release button 800 is pressed (operated).

  As described above, in this modification, the player is notified of the disadvantageous arrangement to the player by the suggestion display image, and the elimination of the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by the depression (operation) of the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (FIG. It is possible to play a game with the aim of becoming an arrangement where balls are guided to the general winning opening 702, as shown. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively participate in the game.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (one minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be switched to the open state (release state). That is, when the ball is detected continuously for a fixed period of time (for example, one minute) by the ball entry sensor 704b, it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is reset. In order to do so, the storage valve 704a may be opened. As a result, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can suppress playing a game for a long time without noticing the disadvantageous state.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is opened when the ball is continuously detected for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time until) is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state can be shortened. Also, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency with which the suggestion display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration in the modification of the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 A difference is that ball entry sensor 228 is electrically connected to input / output port 225. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantageous time counter 223 m and a suggestion display flag 223 n are added to the RAM 223 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used to determine an elapsed time after the player is in a disadvantageous arrangement (a state in which the balls are guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by one each time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (see S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, in the state where the counter value is added (state of a value larger than 0), when the ball is not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player (in a state where the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m, Control is performed to display the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89).

  The suggestion display flag 223 n is a flag indicating whether or not a suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this indication display flag 223 n is on, it indicates that the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. It shows. The suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received, the storage valve 704a is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described.

  In the processes of S1801 to S1817 in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, the same processes as the processes of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is ended, next, the release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. S1821), the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release indication display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501), and if it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether there is any (S4502). Then, if the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and there is no need to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by adding 1 (S4503), and the disadvantageous time after the renewal It is determined whether the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated one by one (every 1 ms) at each main processing (see FIG. 91), the counter value 60000 corresponds to one minute.

  If it is determined in the process of S4503 that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), it is suggested to inform the player that a long time (one minute) has elapsed since the disadvantageous arrangement. A display back image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the ball entry sensor 228 does not detect a ball (the ball entry sensor is off) (S4501: No), it is not a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) First, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 as a result of the determination in the process of S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantageous time counter 223m has been initialized, and there is no need to initialize again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. To complete this process.

  By executing the release suggestion display process (S1821), the player can play the game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains in the arrangement disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. Of the command determination processing, in the processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as the processing of each of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. . In addition, in the command determination process in the present modification, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received from main controller 110 in the process of S1921 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. The storage state command process of (1) is executed (S1929), and the process ends.

  The details of the storage state command process (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command process (S1929). In the storage state command process (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not it is notified by the storage state command that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). When it is determined that the switch to the closed state (storage state) is notified (S4601: Yes), an image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63A) is then displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display rear image change command for displaying on the other hand is set (S 4602), and the storage state flag 223 k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704 a is in the closed state (S 4603). And transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the storage status command has not notified that it is not the closed status (storage status) (it has been notified that the open status (release status) has been switched) (S4601: No) Then, a display rear image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (canceled state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve In order to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S4606). Then, in order to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow-down time counter 2231 is checked to determine whether or not it is a bulbing period until the ball comes off after the storage valve 704a is switched. A counter value corresponding to one second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing the storage state command process (S1931), it is possible to appropriately update the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured to be able to store two balls inside the storage device 700. Further, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken as storage states when the spheres are stored inside. These storage states are different from each other in the ball entrances in which the balls having flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to enter. Further, since the player can visually recognize the inside of the storage device 700, the storage state can be easily judged by visual observation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not the storage state should be reset by temporarily setting the storage valve 704a in the open state.

  In addition, the advantageous storage state (the storage state in which the ball is likely to enter the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and the disadvantageous storage state (the storage state in which the ball is likely to enter the out port shown in FIG. 87) Can be played in anticipation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Then, even in the case of the disadvantageous storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a to regain the advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by becoming an advantageous storage state, and keep winning the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and earning many winning balls I can have a sense of expectation for what I can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, although it was constituted so that two spheres could be stored inside storage device 700, it is not restricted to this and it is good also as an internal structure which can store three or more spheres. . In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided on the left side near the upper end of the guiding flow channel 704, it can be easily determined whether or not it has a disadvantageous arrangement in which it is guided to the out port.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, by providing the ball entry sensor 228 near the upper end of the guiding channel 704, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous for the player? Although it was configured to be able to determine whether or not it is not, the attachment position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be disposed near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 to the right. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, but in the case shown in FIG. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged such that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the arrangement is such that the ball can easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entering sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entering sensor 228 continuously for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that it is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, on the basis of the fact that the balls stored in the advantageous arrangement for the player shown in FIG. 88 are in an advantageous arrangement, it is informed that the present state is advantageous for the player. Can. As a method of notification, for example, the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the character "during advantageous arrangement" and the character "right-handed big chance!" You may This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the current state is in an advantageous state, so the release button 800 is mistakenly pressed (operated) to cause the ball stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. (Resetting the advantageous arrangement) can be suppressed.

  Further, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the induction flow channel 704 to the right and to the left, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the sphere continuously, for example, for 5 seconds, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. In addition, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect the sphere continuously for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement of FIG. 87 (arrangement disadvantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to play the game. Can prompt the person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image (for example, “advantageously” By displaying the character “during placement” and the character “right-handed big chance!” On the small area Ds 2), it is recognized that the present state is advantageous, and You can improve your motivation.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. As a result, a storage state advantageous for the player (see FIG. 88) can be easily realized, so that the player can more positively aim at the storage device 700 to shoot a ball. Further, the inclination of the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize the advantageous storage condition or the adverse storage condition.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage state may be reset on a regular basis, such as the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state during a jackpot. If the player is completely given the opportunity to reset the storage state, once it is in the favorable storage state (see FIG. 88), the game is continued with the storage state maintained, and the player can not enter the hall. It may be a profit. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (prevent) long lasting of the advantageous storage state, thereby preventing disadvantages for the holes.

  In this modification, switching of the state of the storage valve 704a is performed based on pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. As a result, it is possible to cause each player to start playing the game in a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable to his / her preference.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704 a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to perform lottery for whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. May be Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e, a lottery is won. Thus, it is possible to play a game in hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, in the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. It is possible to play a game in hope that the lottery will continue to fall out so as not to Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel game characteristics can be provided. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In this modification, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) is displayed which describes the condition under which the storage valve 704a is opened, the merits and disadvantages when the storage valve 704a is opened. It may be configured to Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704 a is opened only while the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. As a result, there is no need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704 a open. In addition, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. By configuring in this manner, since it is sufficient to operate the release button 800 only when switching the state, it is possible to reduce the number of operations performed by the player. Also, contrary to the release button 800, operation means may be provided in which the storage valve 704a is closed by operating. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to allow each player to select a game characteristic that matches his or her taste.

  In this modification, when a predetermined time (one minute) has passed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to cancel the cancellation. Although the button 800 is configured to be pressed (operated), the method of pressing the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrated (in other words, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 May be electrically connected to each other). When it is determined that the ball is detected continuously by the ball entry sensor 704b for a predetermined period (one minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be constituted so that it becomes easy to choose the change classification by which an effect develops. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set in the open state (release state). In general, since the player observes the result of the fluctuation presentation informing the player whether or not the jackpot is most interesting, when the fluctuation presentation in which the presentation develops by the depression of the frame button 22 is executed, the depression of the frame button 22 is surely performed. The player can be made aware of the prompt. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

  In this modification, the first specified winning opening 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 so that the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a by left hitting, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, as in the first embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, it is possible to flow the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting the right in the special game state (big hit state), so the winning balls in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Thus, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with the storage valves by sliding to the front side and the back side of the front view. While the flow path is closed and the ball can be stored in the upper part, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to close vertically by standing upright on the inner wall portion of the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve falls in the downstream direction of the flow path. The flow path may be configured to allow passage of balls. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not have to completely close the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes to the front side, the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704 is partially opened. It may be configured to be Further, the widths of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball. Thereby, price reduction of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be achieved. Further, when the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704 are set in the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704 may not be completely opened. . That is, the storage valve 607 a and a part of the storage valve 704 a may be in a state in which the storage flow channel 607 and the guidance flow channel 704 protrude. Further, the width of the open portion in the induction flow channel 607 or the induction flow channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thus, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that power consumption for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. Also, if the width of the open part is greater than the diameter of the ball, the inflowing ball may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a and the momentum of the flow may be cut off, but eventually the ball flows down. (It can be made difficult to be stored (held) at the position of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as each of the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, and a state in which the sphere flowing into the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704 flows downstream. .

  In each said embodiment, although each end was made into the out port among each ball socket provided in each storage device, the out port of both ends may be abolished. Even if the out-port is abolished and made into the inner wall, the ball can be made to enter other ball entrances. Also, by eliminating the out-ports at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In the above embodiments, the plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the gaming board 13 in a front view It is good also as a channel which makes a ball flow down to (refer to Drawing 2). As a result, the number of out-ports can be one, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls entering the out-port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, since the number of detection switches for detecting the entering of a ball can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve is one ball (the first embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment), or a two ball (the modification of the second embodiment) However, the invention is not limited thereto, and three or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . Thereby, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow simultaneously to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, so a large amount (5 × 15) of winning balls are paid out in a short time. Can receive As a result, it is possible to feel that the ball is to be stored inside the storage device 600, so it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is shut off. That is, when the shutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, it is configured to return to the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a when the power is shut off. May be As a result, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is shut off, and to suppress the injustice in which the winning ball is immediately obtained upon power recovery.

  In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry port (prize port) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guide channel in which the ball has flowed down (ie, the arrangement of each ball entry port Was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be configured to be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known clune or the like may be disposed on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning hole (ball inlet) may be provided annularly on the clune. And, by rotating the clune, randomness may be given to the winning opening (ball entrance) into which the balls having flowed down each induction channel flow. In this way, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly for the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible. However, the inside of the storage device may be configured to be less visible from the front.

  In the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball enters the ball entry opening (winning opening), the number of winning balls according to the type of the ball entering opening (winning opening) is paid out. Not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine to which a prize ball is not given as a game value such as an enclosed type pachinko machine, and, for example, a prepaid card used for gaming according to the type of ball entry port (prize port) It may be configured to increase the balance.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (provide a winning ball to the ball entering the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls can flow down, and a ball entry means provided at a position in which the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path can enter Specific benefit giving means for giving a specific benefit which is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and The game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state A flow path distribution unit that can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting unit that can set the state of the flow path distribution unit to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the game state. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of award balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of award balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow channel is branched into the first flow channel and the second flow channel. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The specific benefit which is advantageous to the player in comparison with the above is given by the predetermined benefit giving means. The first distribution state in which the game balls having flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is varied by the setting means into at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, the game ball flows into the specific flow path, whereby a specific benefit is easily provided, and the game set to the second distribution state In the state, it becomes difficult to be granted a specific benefit. Therefore, even if the player strikes the game ball toward the specific flow path, since the benefits provided can be made different according to the game state, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine A1, a predetermined ball entering means provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter and a predetermined number based on the gaming ball entering the normal ball entering means. A gaming machine A2 comprising: game value giving means for giving a game value, wherein the specific benefit giving means gives a game value more than the predetermined game value as the specific benefit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined game value giving means is provided based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A gaming value is given. The specified benefit giving means gives a game value more than a predetermined game value as a specified benefit.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the gaming state set in the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. As a result, since the game value to be provided can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game advantageous for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result The game state setting means for setting the state is provided, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means. A game machine A3 characterized by being set to.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, in addition to becoming advantageous to the player by the bonus gaming state, more gaming value is awarded by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path It becomes easy to be done. Thus, the bonus game state can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be improved.

  In game machine A3, variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first ball entry state where game balls can enter the ball and a second ball entry state where game balls are less likely to enter the ball compared to the first ball entry state And specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable entering means, and based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means. A game machine A4 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable entering means into the first entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable ball entry means is varied between the first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and the second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first ball entering state. A specific game value is awarded by the specific value awarding means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means into the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, since the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, it is possible to obtain a specific game value by striking the ball and striking out the ball. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since the player can be made to obtain more game value, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming value giving unit is for giving a predetermined amount of gaming media as the predetermined gaming value when the game ball enters the normal ball entry unit, A game machine A5 characterized in that the specified benefit giving means gives an amount of game medium larger than the predetermined amount as the specified benefit when a game ball enters the ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means by the game value giving means, a predetermined amount of game media is given as the predetermined game value. When the game ball enters the ball entry means, the specified bonus giving means gives a game medium of an amount larger than a predetermined amount as a specific benefit.

  As a result, the player can be made to play a game by the provided game medium, so it is possible to play the game for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means is configured to set the variable ball entering means from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the bonus game state based on the variable game means being changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A game machine A6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is varied by the variable control means from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state a predetermined number of times. A game state different from the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable entering means a predetermined number of times.

  As a result, since the player is given a predetermined number of times an opportunity to enter the ball into the variable entry means in one bonus game state, it is possible to make the player obtain more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  A gaming machine A7 according to any one of gaming machines A4 to A6, characterized in that the specific value imparting means imparts a specific amount of gaming media as the specific gaming value.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the particular value giving means grants a particular amount of gaming media as a particular gaming value, so the player can receive the gaming media. Can play a game. As a result, the player can play the game for a longer time, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game machine is provided with a guiding channel capable of guiding the gaming ball to the specific channel, and the variable ball entering means is the specific flow among the gaming balls flowing into the guiding channel. A game machine A8 characterized in that a game ball which has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming ball is guided to the specific flow path by the induction flow path, and to the specific flow path among the gaming balls flowing into the induction flow path Since the variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that did not flow can enter, the player can launch the game ball into the guiding channel in the bonus game state, and the specific channel and the variable ball entering The ball can flow into the means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since a specific bonus and a specific game value can be obtained, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be further increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to any one of A4 to A8, further comprising: counting means for counting the number of gaming balls having entered the variable entering means, the variable control means having at least a predetermined number counted by the counting means. The variable ball entering means is variably set to the second ball entering state based on the fact that the gaming state setting means is configured to execute the bonus game by establishing a specific condition in the bonus game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means at least for a predetermined period from when the bonus game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to 1 distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of gaming balls having entered the variable entering means is counted by the counting means. At least based on the fact that the number counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined number, the variable ball entering means is changed into the second ball entering state by the variable control means. When the specific condition is satisfied in the bonus game state, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the bonus game state. The flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means in at least a predetermined period from when the bonus game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thus, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific gaming value can be limited to a predetermined number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game to be performed during the bonus game state in hopes that more gaming balls will flow into the specific flow path before the predetermined number is reached and the specific benefit is given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the bonus game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, ball entering detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the ball in the normal ball entering means, and the ball entering means in the bonus game state by the ball entry detecting means A game machine A10, comprising: notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the entering detection means that the game ball has entered the normal entering means, and the entering game means detects the bonus game When it is detected that the gaming ball has entered the normal ball entering means during the state, the predetermined notification is executed by the notifying means, so the flow path distributing means is in spite of being set to the bonus game state When a failure not to be set to the first distribution state occurs, the failure can be recognized for the player or the clerk of the hall by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to solve the problem promptly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow than the second flow path, The flow path distribution unit opens the first flow path in the first distribution state, and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first distribution state. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming ball having flowed into the specific channel is provided at a position where it is easy to be guided in a state where the channel is closed.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where gaming balls which have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened in the first distribution state by the flow path distribution unit, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided in a state where the first flow path is closed.

  Thus, it is possible to change the flow path in which the gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path flow down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously hit toward a specific flow path, a specific benefit is given or not given, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, when the first flow channel is closed in the second distribution state, the flow channel distribution unit can hold the game balls to a predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closing position. In the state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the second flow path is in contact with the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. A game machine A12 characterized in that the game machine A12 is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on the flow direction changing.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the game ball is held to the predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closing position by the flow path distribution means. In a state where a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls are held on the first flow path, the held gaming balls and the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other to change the flow-down direction. The second flow path is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in.

  As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific benefit is given or not given, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display means for displaying an image, and a display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means. A game machine A13 to feature.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means is displayed. The player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution unit.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means causes the game ball to flow into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. A game machine A14 characterized by displaying an image indicating that a benefit is easily given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the specification is made when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. The display control means displays an image indicating that it is easy to give the privilege of As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow channel.

<Feature B group> (switch the flow path of another ball by the ball held by the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls can flow down, and a gaming ball which flows down the first flow path is provided at a position where it can enter First entering means, first applying means for applying a first gaming value based on the game ball entering the first entering means, and the game flowing down the second flow path A second entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the first game provided by the first applying means based on the game ball entering the second entering means. A second giving means for giving a second gaming value different from the value, a first position where the at least one gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and the first A variable that can be changed to a second position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path compared to the position is less likely to be held on the first flow path And a switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the variable means holding the gaming ball to hold the game A game machine B1 characterized in that the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the ball.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow channel is branched into a plurality of flow channels including at least the first flow channel and the second flow channel. The first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the first ball giving means performs the first by the first applying means based on the ball entering the first ball entering means Game value is awarded. In addition, the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the first ball giving means is based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Second game value different from the first game value to be provided is provided by the second giving means. A first position at which at least one gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and a gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path compared to the first position is on the first flow path The variable means is changed to the second position which is difficult to hold in the second position. The changing means is switched by the switching means from the first position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Here, when the gaming ball is held by the variable means, the gaming ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entering means into which the game ball which has flowed into the specific flow path enters according to whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Can be different. Therefore, the gaming value acquired by the player can be varied between the first gaming value and the second gaming value according to whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the first gaming value awarded by the first awarding means is greater in gaming value than the second gaming value awarded by the second awarding means. A game machine B2 to be

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first gaming value to be awarded by the first granting means is configured to have more gaming value than the second gaming value to be granted by the second granting means, It can be made to feel that the game ball is to be flowed into the specific flow channel in the state where the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions and the bonus game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result A variable entering ball that can be changed into a game state setting means, a first entering state in which the game ball can enter, and a second entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first entering state Based on the means, the specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means And variable control means for changing the variable ball entering means into the first ball entering state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the bonus game state by the game state setting means. Said variable based on Gaming machine B3, characterized in that the stage from the first position in which switching to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to A variable ball entry means is varied between a first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first ball entering state, and the variable ball entering A specific gaming value is awarded by the special value awarding means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is changed into the first ball entering state until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

  Thus, in addition to the player being able to acquire a specific gaming value by the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means The player can earn the first gaming value. As a result, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be increased, so that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine B3 includes a guiding channel capable of guiding the gaming ball to the specific channel, and the variable ball entry means is a gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding channel without flowing into the specific channel. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball is guided to the specific flow channel by the induction flow channel. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball which has flowed down the induction channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter the ball.

  As a result, the player can flow the ball into the specific flow passage and the variable ball entry means only by striking the gaming ball into the guiding flow passage in the bonus game state. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since the first game value and the specific game value can be obtained, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be further increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and the position where the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path can enter A third game entry means different from the second game value provided by the second application means based on the provided third ball entry means and the game ball entering the third ball entry means. And third variable imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the variable means holds the game ball and thereby holds the game ball in the second flow path and the third flow path by the holding game ball. A game machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third flow path is provided as one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. The third ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the third flow path can enter the ball. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, the third game value is awarded by the third game value different from the second game value awarded by the second game means. By holding the gaming ball by the variable means, the gaming ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, when the gaming ball is held by the variable means, the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path can enter any of the second entering means and the third entering means. Become. That is, since the player can obtain one of the second game value and the third game value having mutually different game values, the game value obtained by the player can have randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first giving means is provided with the first game value by the game ball having flowed into the specific flow passage entering the first ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different game characteristics can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the third gaming value awarded by the third awarding means is greater in gaming value than the first gaming value awarded by the first awarding means. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value provided by the third providing means has more gaming value than the first gaming value provided by the first providing means. Since the game ball is held by the variable means, it is possible to expect the game ball to flow down the third flow path. Therefore, since the player can be made to observe the advancing direction of the game ball having flowed into the specific flow path more interestingly to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the gaming ball on the first flow path, at least the gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path as the arrangement of the gaming ball to be held is the second It is characterized in that it can be held by a first arrangement which is easily guided to the flow passage and a second arrangement which is easily guided to the third flow passage as compared with the first arrangement. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the gaming ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, the gaming ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path as the arrangement of the held gaming ball is easily guided to the second flow path It is held by the arrangement of 1 and the second arrangement which is more likely to be guided to the third channel as compared to its first arrangement.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path where the game balls are likely to flow in only by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a determination means for determining whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means A game machine B8 comprising: an execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the judging means whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the judgment result by the judging means is executed by the effect executing means The effect is that the player can more easily determine the flow path in which the game ball is likely to flow.

  One of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized in that it comprises adjustment means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow channel into the second flow channel and the 3 flow channels. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio at which the gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path flow into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make the gaming machine to which the second benefit is easily given or the gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given by the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specification of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the sales policy of each hall.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the game machine comprises operation means operable by the player and detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and the switching means operates the operation means by the detection means. A game machine B10 characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on being detected.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation on the operation means is detected by the detection means. The changing means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on detection of an operation on the operation means by the detection means.

  In this way, it is possible to switch whether or not to allow the player to cause the game ball having flowed down to the specific flow channel to flow down to the first ball entry means, so that each player is fit for his / her taste There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

  One of game machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one game ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held by the variable means on the first flow path, so that the variable means is changed to the first position When the player quits playing the game, the game ball remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost when leaving the game.

<Feature C group> (The probability change ratio can be changed by adjusting the ratio of the ball entering the storage device)
A first flow passage which is branched into at least a first flow passage where the game ball can flow down and a second flow passage, and a first ball entry where the game ball which has flowed down the first flow passage is provided at a position where it can enter Means and first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit based on the game ball entering the first entering means, and the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path A second benefit different from the first benefit is provided based on the second ball entering means provided at the ball entry enable position and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second benefit granting means that can be used, and an adjustment means that can adjust the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the specific flow path to the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively; A game machine C1 comprising:

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player plays a game in the same type of game machine, the ball keeps winning in the same winning opening as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, and the number of balls to be paid out is also scarcely changed There was a case. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can flow. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first benefit giving means One benefit is awarded. The second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, different from the first benefit The second benefit is awarded by the second benefit awarding means. The ratio in which the game ball which has flowed down the specific flow channel flows into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is adjusted by the adjusting means.

  Thus, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine to which the first benefit is easily given or the gaming machine to which the second benefit is easy to be imparted. Therefore, even with the same model, different game characteristics can be realized by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjustment means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result In a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the specific lottery result is high, and in a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state And a lottery condition setting unit that can be set, wherein the first benefit giving unit controls the first lottery condition to be set by the lottery condition setting unit as the first benefit. A gaming machine C2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the gaming result when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result A bonus game advantageous to the person is awarded by the bonus game awarding means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a specific lottery result is high and the second lottery state in which the probability that a particular lottery result is more than the first lottery state is low . It is controlled by the first benefit granting means so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first benefit.

  Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjustment means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the sales policy of the hall, and it is difficult to set the first lottery state so as to be a game characteristic that easily becomes the bonus game state, and the game characteristic that the second benefit is easily given Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a versatile game machine which can be adapted to the sales policy of each hole.

  In the game machine C1 or C2, a game machine C3 characterized in that the second benefit awarding means grants a predetermined amount of game media as the second benefit.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of gaming medium is provided as the second benefit by the second benefit giving means, and therefore, the easiness of provision of the predetermined amount of gaming medium Can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether to make the game characteristic in which the predetermined amount of game media is easily given or the game characteristic in which the first benefit is easily given according to the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a versatile game machine which can be adapted to the sales policy of each hole.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball compared to the first position Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the bonus game is given by the bonus game giving means; , A game machine C4 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable means changes the first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the first ball entry means, and the second position where the game ball can not easily enter the ball compared to the first position. Be done. Based on the fact that the bonus game is awarded by the bonus game awarding means, the variable control means varies the variable means to the first position until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, since the first benefit is easily provided in the benefit game state, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the benefit game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on the passage of a predetermined time after at least the variable means is changed to the first position. A game machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the variable control unit is moved to the second position by the variable control unit based on the passage of a predetermined time after the variable unit is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the player to acquire the first benefit until the predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first benefit can be increased, the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine to play a game, it is possible to select the gaming machine in consideration of the degree of adjustment of the adjusting means, so that it is possible to give fun to select the gaming machine. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific entering means to which a specific gaming value is awarded based on the entering of the gaming ball, and a specific entering value based on the entering of the gaming ball. And the second flow path is a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means, and the second flow path to the low value ball entry means. In a first variable position, which is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and in which at least one gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and in the first variable position A game machine C6, comprising position variable means capable of changing the game ball having flowed into the specific flow path to a second variable position which is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific gaming value is awarded based on the game ball entering the specific entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value entering means Less game value than a specific game value is awarded based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path for flowing the gaming ball to the specific ball entry means and a low-value flow path for flowing to the low-value ball entry means. The first variable position capable of holding at least one gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow channel on the specific flow channel, and the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow channel compared to the first variable position is retained on the specific flow channel The position variable means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to be done.

  Thereby, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entering means is such that the game ball flowed into the second flow path enters the ball according to the variable position of the position variable means. It can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  The gaming machine C6 includes holding control means for controlling the position variable means to change to the second variable position based on the fact that the bonus game is given by the bonus game giving means, and the specific channel Is located at a position where gaming balls having flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow in than the low-value flow path, and the position changing means holds the gaming balls by holding the game balls. A game machine C7 characterized in that the game ball is easily guided to the low-value flow path by the game ball being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the bonus game is awarded by the bonus game awarding means, the position variable means is varied to the second variable position by the holding control means. The specific flow channel is disposed at a position where the gaming balls having flowed into the second flow channel are more likely to flow in than the low-value flow channel. By holding the gaming ball by the position variable means, the gaming ball is guided to the low-value channel by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, according to whether the variable position of the position variable means and the game ball are held by the position variable means, it is possible to make the ball entry means into which the game ball which has flowed into the second flow path enter the ball different. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  A game machine C9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member, so the position and the position variable of the variable means can be controlled by one control. The position of the means can be switched simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjustment means causes the game ball to enter the second ball when the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow channel to the first ball entering means is increased. By reducing the rate of flow into the ball means, and reducing the rate of flow of the game ball into the first ball entry means, increase the rate of flow of the game ball into the second ball entry means A game machine C10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the gaming machine having flowed into the specific flow path increases the ratio of the flow of the gaming ball into the first flow path by the adjusting means The rate at which the balls flow into the second channel is reduced. In addition, when the ratio in which the gaming ball flowing down to the specific flow channel flows into the first flow channel is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio in which the gaming ball flows into the second flow channel is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game balls can be more easily introduced into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, which is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
601 General Prize Win (Normal Entry Method)
602 General prize winning opening (entry means)
606 induction channel (second channel)
607 Induction channel (first channel)
607a Storage valve (channel distribution means)
701 General Prize Win (Normal Entry Means)
702 General prize winning opening (entry means)
704 Induction channel (first channel)
704a Storage valve (channel distribution means)
708 second channel (induction channel)
S218 Game state setting means S305 Lottery means S1103 Setting means S1302 Setting means S4003 and S4007 Setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a particular winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of award balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of award balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

However, there is a possibility that Yu technique becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the game becomes monotonous.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a position where game balls fired in a specific direction can enter and a first variable state in which the game balls can enter, and A variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second variable state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball than the first variable state, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and discrimination by the discrimination means Variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second variable state to the first variable state a predetermined number of times based on the specific determination result, and the specific direction a particular channel that the emitted gaming ball is provided which can be flow-down position to a first ball entrance means game balls provided in ball entrance possible positions inflows to the specific flow path, the specific The game ball having flowed into the flow path is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the first entry A different second ball entrance means and means, the game balls to the first ball entrance means based especially the ball entrance, advantageously Yu technique's than when a game ball has ball entrance to the second ball entrance means and privilege assigning means for assigning specific benefits become, game ball which has flowed into said specific flow path, a first state in which easily ball entrance to the first ball entrance means, than its first state, The game machine further includes a variable means capable of changing into a second state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entering means, and the variable means includes the variable ball entering means during execution of the variable game. Is variable in the first variable state while variable in the second variable state, and configured to be variable in the second state while the variable ball entry means is variable in the first variable state The first ball entering means is fired in the particular direction, and the variable ball entering means Ru der which game balls that did not ball entrance is provided at least on the inflow possible a position.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the game ball launched in the specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter and the first variable state where the game ball can enter the ball and the game than the first variable state It became a specific judgment result by the judgment by the judgment means by which the variable entering means which can be changed to the second variable state where the ball is difficult to enter the ball, the judgment means which executes the judgment based on the establishment of the judgment condition, and the judgment means Variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is varied from the second variable state to the first variable state a predetermined number of times on the basis of the variable ball entering means and the game ball fired in the specific direction A specific channel provided at a position where it can flow down, a first ball entry means provided at a position where game balls that have flowed into the specific channel can enter, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific channel A second ball entering provided at a position where it can enter the ball and different from the first ball entering means Based on the fact that the game ball enters the stage and the first ball entering means, a special benefit is given to the player that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second ball entering means The game ball goes to the second ball entry means than the first state in which the game means that has flowed into the specific flow path is easier to enter the first ball entry means than the first means and the first state. And a second state that facilitates entering the ball, the variable means being variable, wherein the variable ball entering means is changed to the second variable state during execution of the variable game. And the variable ball entry means is configured to be capable of being varied to the second state while being varied to the first variable state. The ball entering means is the game ball which was fired in the specific direction and did not enter the variable ball entering means. Those provided on the inlet allows a position even without.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the Yu technique becomes monotonous.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where right-handed navigation was displayed, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where the right-handed warning image was displayed. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in the middle of a big hit, (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when a ball entered into a large value winning opening during big hit. (A), (b) is the figure which illustrated the display screen where the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus, when the storage valve is closed, (b) flowed into the storage apparatus, when the storage valve was open | released It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a ball | bowl. It is a figure which shows an upstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the routes provided in the right side of the game board. (A) is a figure which shows the state in which the 1st specification winning a prize mouth was opened, and (b) is a figure showing the state in which the 2nd specification winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path | route of the ball in the state in which the 1st specific winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure showing the path of the ball in the state where the 1st specification winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure showing a course of a ball in the state where the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure showing a course of a ball in the state where the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered the inside of a 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state in which the probability change ball opening is closed, (b) is a probability change ball opening being opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which entered into the inside of a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in a state. (A) is a figure which shows time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning opening in the 12th round of jackpot A, and the state of the flow path in the 2nd variable winning prize device, (b) is 12 of jackpot B It is a figure which shows the time change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the round, and the state of the channel in the 2nd variable prize-winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in a regular symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning command setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error information processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit | notification alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process at the time of normal performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in, when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) is a display screen in case the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is opened. FIG. It is a front view of the storage apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into a storage apparatus in the case where the storage valve in a 2nd embodiment is closed is guided to a high value winning opening, (b) is a It is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus in the case where the storage valve in 2 embodiment is closed is induced | guided | derived to a low value winning opening. When the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment is open | released, it is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in into the storage apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the prescription content of the 1st contact classification selection table in a 2nd embodiment, (b) is a block diagram showing the electric composition of RAM in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process at the time of cancellation | release performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen in the jackpot in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the storage apparatus in the state which the slide member of the modification of 1st Embodiment protruded in the front view near side, and (b) is a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a top view of the storage apparatus and the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus in the state where the slide member of an example was buried by the front view back side. It is a figure which shows the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize mouth closing processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error alerting | reporting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing 2 of hits performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state which the ball | bowl stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became a disadvantage arrangement | positioning for a player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball | bowl which flowed in in the storage apparatus in the state which the ball | bowl stored in the storage apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment became arrangement | positioning advantageous for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation | release suggestion display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 2nd embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, showing a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (movable member 310). Rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first entrance 64, second entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, ordinary entrance (not shown) Through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, storage device 600 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display unit 80, and the storage device 600 are processed by the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the through hole formed in, and is fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed in response to the winning of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and the ball enters the ordinary ball entry port 67. When it passes, the lottery of the normal design (the 2nd design) is done. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. In addition, for convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for entering the ball to the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as “lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the row for entering the ball to the second ball entry 640 The lottery of special symbols to be played is referred to as the "special symbol 2 lottery".

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a, which is normally closed at the same time, continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) Alternatively, the operation of opening the ball 10 times is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won), 12 In the round, the second specified winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (e.g., until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, and therefore, a greater amount of winning balls are paid out than in the normal time.

  Also, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probably variable ball entrance 654, and normal ball entry for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot awarded after the end of the special game state A mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although the details will be described later, when the ball enters the probability changing ball opening 654 in the special game state, a "special symbol high probability state" is given as an added value after the big hit ends. On the other hand, when the ball has not entered the definite change ball entrance 654 even during the special game state, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is given as the added value after the big hit end. In addition, as a jackpot type of a special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided (refer FIG.18 (b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a is different depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probability variation ball entrance 654 is varied.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls reserved for the first entrance 64 (number of balls reserved for special symbol 1), or the number of balls reserved for the second entrance 640 (specially selected) If the number of balls held for symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the holding balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary ball entry port 67, it is determined whether the regular symbol is hit or not. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be easy. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol is facilitated.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37 While being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the normal ball entry port 67 remains, the lottery of the next normal symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery is It is started.

  When it becomes "big hit A", and "big hit B", it becomes special game state (15 R big hit) of the number of rounds of 15 rounds. In addition, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability change ball entrance 654, as the added value after the big hit end, while the big hit is finished until the next big hit of the pachinko machine 10 is high of the special symbol Move to the probability state (due to special symbol oddity). On the other hand, if the ball has not entered the definite game entrance ball slot 654 at least once in the special gaming state, as an added value after the big hit ends, the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times after the big hit end While, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the big hit end, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol together. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although details will be described later, in "big hit B", compared to "big hit A", it becomes easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance 654 in the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, since "big hit B" is more likely to shift to a special symbol in a definite variation state after the big hit, it is likely to be a big hit again at a short interval after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (due to probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift. In the high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the definite variation of the special symbol), the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640 is included. . On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the special symbol is not in a certain variation, and the jackpot probability is a normal condition, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol. In addition, the time saving state (during time) of the normal symbol refers to a gaming state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640 because the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game which is neither a special symbol oddity nor an ordinary symbol time-short (a jackpot probability or a normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability is also not increased).

  During special symbols or during regular symbol shorting, not only is the probability of hitting the symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A long time is set in comparison with. When the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 as compared to the case where the motorized role 640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time shortening of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time thereof The number of times of opening the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit may be configured to be larger than that in the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) does not change during the time variation of the special symbol or the time symbol of the normal symbol, and the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, At least one of the opening times of the motorized accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened during the special symbol odd variation or the normal symbol time change, the ordinary symbol ( Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be up compared to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when a definite variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, although the definite variation state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot, it is not limited thereto. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, after the end of the special game state until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 10 times is given a probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, and after the lottery of the special symbol is ended 10 times May be set to be in the normal state. In addition, the number of times the special symbol is in a definite variation state is not limited to 10 times, and may be determined arbitrarily. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability changing ball opening 654 in the special gaming state, it is configured to be in the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times. However, the time period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be determined arbitrarily.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side top (the upper right of FIG. 2) of the game area A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed. To display the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol as the stop symbol after the end of the variation, or the ball entered in the first ball entrance 64 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance The number of balls is held for a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 9 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17), for example, upper, middle and lower Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the liquid crystal display.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-7, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the main number to which any one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is added A variable display in which the symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of balls held as the number of balls (parking balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character An announcement effect is performed by making it appear.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of ball arrivals is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held. In addition, FIG.4 (b) is an example in case the number of holding balls corresponding to the ball-in to the 1st entrance 64 is four balls. When the holding ball corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640 is generated, the holding ball number pattern of the aspect different from the holding ball number pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed Be done. As a result, the player can easily determine the number of holding balls corresponding to the first ball entry 64 and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second ball 640. It can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5 (a), a display (right-handed navi) prompting the third symbol display device 81 to strike a path on the right side (flow path) of the game board 13 is made. The display content when it occurs will be described.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric symbol 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball to the right of the game board 13 is released. The ball can be made easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting (right hitting). Moreover, although it mentions later for details, when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is easy to become "big hit B" compared with the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol performed based on the ball entering the ball (lottery of special symbol 1). Therefore, in the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player by executing the right hitting. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a definite pattern or the normal symbol is set to a short time, the ball can not enter the second ball entry port 640 unless the player strikes the right, so the special is special. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol variation state or the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the short symbol state of the normal symbol, the player is in the definite variation state of the special symbol by displaying the image (right-handed navi) illustrated in FIG. And it is structured to be able to obtain the benefit by becoming a time saving state of a normal symbol surely.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5 (a), in the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed for the small area Ds3 in the sub display area Ds, and the character is directed to the right above and below Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely obtain the benefit from the definite variation state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5B, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Although the warning image illustrated in FIG. 5 (b) is not a period in which the player should strike the ball (pass to the right) to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13, the right strike It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that it is being executed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player has made a right-handed strike in the normal state (in a state where neither special symbol oddity nor ordinary symbol short time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the motorized accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily released in the normal state (the ball is unlikely to enter the second ball entry port 640 even if the right strike is performed). For this reason, if the player strikes the right in the normal state, the chances of receiving a special symbol lottery will be reduced as compared to the case of striking the ball at the first entrance 64 by striking the left. That is, when the player strikes the right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting a left-handed hit, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is hitting the right in the normal state, "warning" is performed on the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "Let's play with left strike!" Are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made to notice that he should not hit the right (should hit the left). Also, by checking the presence of a right strike warning screen (see FIG. 5 (b)), the store clerk in the hall also sees if there is a player who is performing an unusual game method that strikes the right in the normal state. It can be easily determined.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not right strike is performed, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) to which the ball can flow when right strike is performed. . More specifically, when the ball enters either of the general winning openings 601, 602 provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) or the out openings 603a to 603c (in each ball entry opening When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball entry switch provided, it is determined that the player has made a right strike.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and flows the ball to the general winning opening 602 according to the gaming state. It is set to two types of states with the state (refer FIG.9 (b)) which is easy to be made to carry out. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (a special symbol oddity state, a normal symbol short time state, a normal state), the ball is set to be easy to flow down to the general winning opening 601. The general winning opening 601 is a winning opening (for example, three) where the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball enters the ball is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602. For this reason, even if the right strike is performed in the normal state, there is little merit for the ball to enter the storage device 600 (the ball can not be increased). That is, when the right strike is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases and the holding balls also decrease, so that the disadvantage for the player is increased. For this reason, in order to prevent the player from continuing to carry out the game method disadvantageous to him (the game method in which the player strikes the right in the normal state), the right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed. Is configured as.

  It should be noted that, as a factor to determine whether or not to display a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only entering a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 that is easy to win in a normal state, but also winning It is also determined whether or not the player has entered the difficult-to-play general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 etc. because the possibility of illegal gaming is taken into consideration. That is, in the normal state, by continuing to enter the ball illegally into the general winning opening (for example, 15 payouts) with a large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 15 payouts), without passing through the jackpot There is a possibility that the illegal gaming method to obtain a large number of winning balls may be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has won (entered the ball) to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the normal state, the player is hit on the left (right A right strike warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) prompting to not strike is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress unauthorized gaming.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the ball entrances (general winning ports 601, 602, out ports 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state In addition, although the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with many winning balls to be paid out, the illegal game is It may be configured to display a right-handed warning image by determining that it is being performed. As a result, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of the fraud only by confirming the presence or absence of the right strike warning image. In addition, if it is detected that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the hole computer is being tampered with. May be configured to output a signal indicating. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine the presence or absence of the possibility that the fraud is being performed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud is being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player strikes the right based on detection of ball entry into each ball entry port (general winning port 601, 602, out port 603a-603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that it is performed, the method for determining whether or not right strike is performed is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting the right when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 A well-known sensor capable of detecting that the ball has passed may be disposed on the upper side, and it may be determined that the player is hitting the right when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a view showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a jackpot occurs, for example, an image is displayed in which a boy character 710 finds a treasure box 715 filled with treasure. This treasure suggests a large number of prize balls that the player earns in the special game state (jackpot state). This display can amplify the joy of winning a prize ball, and thus can provide a sense of satisfaction with being a jackpot. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, a display area 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is provided. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters “ROUND3” are displayed in the display area 714. The player can recognize that the present is the third round of the jackpot by confirming this display. Therefore, the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot can be easily recognized by the player.

  Furthermore, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navi image is displayed as in the special variation state of special symbols or in the short time state of normal symbols. That is, the text "Aim for the right!" Is displayed for the small area Ds3 and arrows pointing to the right are displayed above and below the text. By displaying this right-handed navi image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be hit to the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) be able to. If you strike left despite the special gaming state (big hit state), it will be provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and will be released in the special gaming state (big hit state) It becomes impossible to enter the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. That is, the player can not lose a large number of winning balls and loses the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player is urged to perform the right strike by displaying the right-handed navi image (see FIG. 6A) even in the special gaming state (big hit state). Thereby, the player is configured to be able to win a winning ball at the jackpot.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, there is formed a number-of-winnings display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (entering) to the general winning opening 602. In the number-of-winnings display area MA, for example, characters of “EXTRA BONUS × 10” are displayed as shown in 6 (a). The word "EXTRA BONUS" means that the winning balls are obtained in a different way from the winning balls obtained by entering the balls into the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a. ing. Specifically, it means that a winning ball is obtained by entering the ball into the general winning opening 602. The letter “× 10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 at the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has been entered ten times to the general winning hole 602 in one round to three rounds.

  In addition, a schematic view of the storage device 600 is displayed above the character “EXTRA BONUS × 10”, and a character “EXTRA BONUS gate open” is displayed on the upper side. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (release state). In addition, in the schematic view of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon with the characters “Aim for it!” Is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 . By this balloon, it is possible to recognize that it becomes advantageous (if a large number of winning balls can be obtained) when the player enters a ball into the general winning opening 602.

  FIG. 6 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6 (b), when the entry into the general winning opening 602 is detected in the jackpot, the character "GET" is displayed in the portion where the schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which the ball enters the ball is displayed at a location corresponding to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the schematic view of the storage device 600. Furthermore, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS × 10” to “EXTRA BONUS × 11” in the number-of-winnings display area MA. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a winning ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602.

  In this manner, by displaying the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening 602 during the jackpot, the winning ball is different from entering the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a in the jackpot. The player can be made aware of the number of times he has won. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the number of “EXTRA BONUS” (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) increases. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left strike warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the left strike is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that left hitting is performed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the large display area, the characters "Warning" are displayed in a large size, and the characters "Aim for an attacker with a right-handed attack!" By displaying these characters in the large display area, the player can be made to recognize that the current game method (left strike) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, the player can be made to obtain a large number of winning balls reliably in the special game state (big hit state).

  The determination as to whether or not the player has made a left strike is determined by whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is hitting the left, and the left strike warning image Control is performed so that FIG. 7A is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the left hit warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor for detecting passage of a ball is provided on a path (channel) provided on the left side of the game board 13 and a left strike warning image (when passage of the ball is detected by the sensor during a big hit You may comprise so that FIG. 7 (a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 means, for example, when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is detected despite the special gaming state (big hit state) or the special gaming state (big hit) When entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is detected despite the fact that the state is not), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the characters “Warning” are displayed large in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call a gate error clerk" are displayed. With these characters, it is possible for the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the store clerk or the like in the hall can be requested to repair etc. quickly.

  Also, if the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a large number of winning balls always paid out, etc., by changing the wiring etc. illegally, etc. The store clerk can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity only by confirming the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, the ball is fixed in a state where it is easy to enter the ball into the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602, and aiming at the storage device 600 and striking out the ball prevents the illegal act of increasing the ball without passing the big hit. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the ordinary entry (through gate) 67. The variable display is performed to alternately turn on for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol (variable time) is set so that the game state is shorter than in the normal state, during the definite change of the special symbol, or during the short time of the normal symbol. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during a certain symbol of the special symbol and during the short pattern of the normal symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is in a certain variation, and the normal symbol is in time.

  In addition, to the second ball entrance 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting or increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a during the definite variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the special symbol or during the time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electrically operated accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal ball entry port 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board is configured to be passable. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entry port 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is made. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display, as well as the variable display of the second symbol, is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of holding balls for passing the ball of the normal ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) . Further, the number of assembled normal ball entry ports 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the ordinary ball entry port 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When the ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at 110 (see FIG. 17), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side in the front view of the variable display unit 80 (below the normal ball entry port 67), a second ball entry port 640 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the first symbol display device 37 shows a display according to the lottery result.

  In addition, each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 is also one of the prize-winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 are configured the same. However, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the first ball entry 64 may be different from the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second ball entry 640. For example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins to the first ball entry 64 is 3 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning to the second ball entry 640 is 5 It is also good.

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role part 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal ball entry port 67, the motorized role 640a is in the open state The state is (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the symbol usually is high compared to that in the normal state, and the time it takes to display the variation of the symbol is short, so the variation of the symbol is normal. It becomes easy to display the symbol of "○" in display. Thus, the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, the time during which the motorized jack 640a is opened also becomes longer than during the normal state, during the special symbol oddity and during the normal symbol time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640, as compared to the normal state, during the definite variation of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part such as that provided at the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can be won.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball hits the second entrance 640. is there. However, as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot, the probability of being a jackpot (big jack B) that is easy to enter the ball into the probability changing ball opening 654 during the special game state is the second entrance ball opening 640 The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins at the first entrance 64.

  During normal operation, the motorized accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640, so the first ball entrance without the motorized symbol is provided. Toward the mouth 64, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and winning in the first entrance 64 provides many opportunities for a big hit lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through the normal ball entry port 67, the motorized role piece 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state during the time change of the special symbol or the time pattern of the normal symbol Since it is easy to win the ball exit 640, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and it is normally entered. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a big hit B by winning the second ball entry port 640 while making the motorized part open by passing the ball port 67.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the process of being changed, the regular symbol is short, or the normal status is being used). It is possible for the person to change the way of firing the ball to "left strike" and "right strike". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and a horizontally-long rectangular first specified winning hole is disposed substantially in the center A (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if it becomes a big hit in the drawing of the special symbol made due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol for the big hit. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specified winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The first specified winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specified winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 14 times (14 rounds) at the maximum. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specified winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the first specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening and closing driving to the front side about the lower side of the opening and closing plate ( Not shown). The first specified winning combination opening 65 a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the first specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a horizontally long rectangular second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is provided on the upper side thereof. . The opening and closing plate covering the second specified winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting to the front side in the front view (see FIG. 14A). ). On the other hand, the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and when it comes to the 12th round, the open / close version covering the second specified winning opening 650a slides to the back side of the front view and is buried to the back side of the game board 13, the ball 2) An open state capable of entering the ball into the variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14 (b)).

  As described above, based on the ball entering the second specified winning hole 650a in the special gaming state (big hit) based on entering the probability variation ball inlet 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650 After the end of the jackpot, transition to a special symbol oddity state. On the other hand, even if the ball does not enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the special gaming state, or enters the second specified winning opening 650a, all the balls normally enter the ball entrance 655 If you do, after the end of the jackpot transition to the normal symbol of the time saving state.

  In addition, a special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a as a winning opening to be opened in the special gaming state, may be further provided another winning opening. Also, conversely, the winning combination may be made only to the first specified winning combination 65a. Also, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of this embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

  A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning ports 601, 602, and out ports 603a to 603c) in its interior, and allows the entered ball to flow down to any of the ball entrances. be able to. In addition, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside of the storage device 600 (stop the flow). Furthermore, the front side of the storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover in the front view side, and a ball which has flowed (entered) into the storage device 600 enters into any ball entry port. It is configured to be able to confirm easily. The details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an overview of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured such that a sphere can be introduced into the interior thereof via the guiding channel 605. The storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three of the struck balls when the player strikes the right. The ball that has not entered the induction flow channel 605 flows along the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flows down in the direction of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. That is, in the special gaming state, a part of the ball fired toward the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a causes the player to enter the storage device 600 through the guiding channel 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branching member 604 are provided downstream of the induction flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide channel 606 is provided on the left side in a front view. Most of the balls flowing down the induction flow channel 606 enter a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) capable of detecting that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 601a that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three winning balls are paid out. It should be noted that on the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, the balls which did not enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite flowing down the guiding channel 606 are discharged. Out ports 603a and 603b are provided. By these out ports, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the sphere from being deposited inside the storage device 600, and to reliably discharge the sphere which has flowed down the guiding channel 606. Further, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are respectively provided on the out ports 603a and 603b, as in the case of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. The number of ejected balls can be accurately determined by the detection switches 603a1 and 603b1.

  Inside the storage device 600, on the right side in a front view, a guiding channel 607 through which a ball can flow is provided. Most of the gaming balls having flowed down the guidance channel 607 enter a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) capable of detecting that the ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 602a detects that the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 15 winning balls are paid out. That is, compared to the case where the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, more winning balls can be obtained when entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. it can. In addition, out ports 603 b and 603 c are provided on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 respectively. These outports prevent (inhibit) the deposition of balls that did not enter the general prize winning opening (high value winning prize opening) 602 into the inside of the storage device 600, and the balls that flowed down the guiding channel 607 It can be discharged reliably. Further, a detection switch 603c1 (not shown) is provided at the out port 603c, similarly to the out ports 603a and 603b. The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of ejected balls.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 when it becomes a special gaming state (big hit state). In the state other than the special game state (big hit state), it is set to a state where it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special gaming state, in addition to the fact that a large number of winning balls are obtained by opening the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, a general winning opening in the storage device 600 (large value winning The ball is constructed so that a winning ball can be obtained by winning the ball to the mouth 602. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of winning balls is relatively paid out. The ball is set to a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the small winning prize opening (small value winning prize entry) 601. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, since there is little merit to bring the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special gaming state, always trying to receive a large amount of payout by aiming the storage device 600. Unusual game methods can be prevented (suppressed). In addition, as mentioned above, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the ball by paying out based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Thus, in the normal state, it is possible to make the player want to hit the left.

  A storage valve 607 a is provided in the guide channel 607. The storage valve 607 a can block the guiding flow channel 607 by projecting to the front side in the front view, and can prevent the flow of the ball advanced to the guiding flow channel 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (stored) at the top of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side in the front view (the state in which the induction channel 607 is closed), and the storage valve 607a is on the back side in the front view It is configured to be switchable to a buried state (a state in which the ball can flow down the induction channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607 a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the side of the guiding flow channel 606 by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guiding flow channel 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protrusion 604 a provided on the branch member 604 is set high enough to prevent the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607 a from flowing out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball entering the storage device 600 will be described for each of two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. Fig.9 (a) is a figure which shows operation | movement of the ball which entered the storage apparatus 600 in the state which the storage valve 607a protruded to the near side, FIG.9 (b) is a front view back side of the storage valve 607a. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the ball | bowl which entered into the storage apparatus 600 in the state buried in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, half or more of the lower end of the induction channel 605 overlaps the upper end of the induction channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the induction flow channel 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605 a of the induction flow channel 605 and hardly overlaps the lower end portion of the induction flow channel 605. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction channel 605 can easily advance to the induction channel 607.

  The sphere advanced to the guiding channel 607 is blocked by the reservoir valve 607a and stops at the top of the reservoir valve 607a (spheres are stored). Then, in the state where the ball is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the ball is stored), when another ball newly flows down the induction flow channel 605, it flows down the induction flow channel 605 anew The contact ball interferes with the ball stored on the storage valve 607a. This contact (interference) changes the trajectory (flowing direction) of the ball which has newly flowed down the induction channel 605.

  Since the guiding channel 607 is provided slightly to the right of the guiding channel 605 (see FIG. 9A), the spheres stored on the storage valve 607a are newly added to the guiding channel 605. It is almost always the case that you stop on the right side of the ball coming down. Therefore, the ball which has newly flowed down the guiding channel 605 is repelled to the left in a front view by colliding with the left side of the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, the ball which has newly flowed down the induction flow channel 605 travels to the induction flow channel 606 provided on the left in front view. As described above, most of the balls flowing down the guiding flow channel 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of winning balls to be paid out (three winning balls). That is, when the storage valve 607a protrudes to the front side in front view and the ball can not flow down the induction channel 607 (the induction channel 607 is closed), most of the spheres entering the storage device 600 are general Enter the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is in the state of being buried behind in the front view (see FIG. 9B), there is nothing to prevent the flow of the ball advanced to the guiding channel 607, so the guiding channel 607 The ball which has advanced to the lower side flows down the induction channel 607 as it is and enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. As described above, since the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is a winning opening with a relatively large number (15) of winning balls to be paid out, the player has many merits for winning.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be in a state in which the ball can flow down the induction channel 607 (see FIG. 9B) when the jackpot is hit. Therefore, in the special game state, by performing a right strike, the ball is awarded to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, and in addition to the fact that a large number of winning balls can be obtained A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the obtained ball being awarded to the general winning opening (large value winning hole) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Also, as described above, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out is closed by the storage valve 607a and is relatively paid out. It is set such that the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. That is, in a state other than the special gaming state, since there is little merit to bring the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special gaming state, always trying to receive a large amount of payout by aiming the storage device 600. The game method can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction channel 607 enters the general entrance 602 Although it is comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, a well-known Kroon device provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different winning balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. It is also good. As a result, even if the guiding flow channel 606 flows down, many winning balls can be obtained by entering the winning opening with a relatively large number of winning balls paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters any one winning opening. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage flow channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607 a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the guide flow channel 607. However, for example, the induction flow channel using an electromagnet or the like You may comprise so that a ball may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow passage 607, and in a state other than the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the electromagnet is magnetized by being energized. As a result, the ball first flowing into the guiding channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for embedding the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Thus, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a was made into one ball, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that two or more spheres can be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out port, a winning port may be provided in which a winning ball is paid out. In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out may be made different by entering the ball into each winning opening. More specifically, for example, the winning opening is provided with six winning openings instead of the out opening 603a, the winning opening is provided with ten winning balls instead of the out opening 603b, and the winning opening is provided instead of the out opening 603c. There may be 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the induction channel 606 or to which winning opening the ball enters the induction channel 607. In addition, a member capable of changing the flow-down direction of the ball such as a nail may be provided downstream of the guiding flow channel 606 or the guiding flow channel 607, and the winning opening on which any ball enters may be more random. . In this way, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters the winning opening. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry port where a ball can easily enter the ball by a store clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball-fall rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hole side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the route when the player ejects a ball to the right of the game board 13 (when hit to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a view showing a portion on the upstream side of the storage device 600 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 10, in the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13, a normal ball entry port 67 is provided at the upper part thereof. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. And if it becomes a hit of a normal symbol, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, after the fluctuation production for showing the lottery result of a normal symbol is performed, the "o" symbol which shows a hit of a normal symbol is displayed. Then, based on the display of the “o” symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal ball entry port 67 is It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds × 1 time or 1 second × 2 times). While the motorized role piece 640 is open, the ball hitting the right easily enters the second ball entry port 640. As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity and during the regular symbol time, while the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening period of the motorized symbol is extended, so The ball enters the ball entry port 640 easily. Therefore, by executing the right strike, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol without reducing the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a portion on the downstream side of the second ball entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, among the balls that flowed down to the downstream of the right path (flow path) by the player hitting the right, the balls that flowed down to the storage device 600 without flowing into the storage device 600 1 Flow down in the direction of the variable winning device 65. Further, the ball which has flowed down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65 and has not entered the first specified winning opening 65 a flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650.

  Thus, the ball can be made to flow down in the direction of the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 only by the player performing a right strike. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can enter the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a simply by performing a right hit, and a large amount of balls can be inserted. You can win a prize ball. In addition, a part of the ball launched by aiming at the first specified winning hole 65 a or the second specified winning hole 650 a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special game state (big hit state), most of the balls entering the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), During the special game state, the player can win more balls. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable in the front view front direction. By opening the first specified winning opening 65a, the gaming ball having flowed down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 enters the first specified winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specified winning opening 65a is in a special game state (big hit state) 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls) It will be released until the prize). Then, when the ball enters the first specified winning combination opening 65a, 15 winning balls are paid out for the entry of one ball. Thus, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the second specified winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 may be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding to the back in the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the gaming ball having flowed down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 enters a state where it can enter the ball. As described above, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won) in 12 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state). Then, when the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a, 15 winning balls are paid out for the entry of one ball. Thus, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball which has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handling and reached the first specified winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13A is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is closed, the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a. Because it can not be done, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specified winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13 (a)). Then, the ball dropped to the front side of the first specified winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specified winning opening 65a. In addition, since the flow path under the first specified winning hole 65a is inclined in the direction of the second specified winning hole 650a, the ball flows down in the direction of the second specified winning hole 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specified winning opening 65a in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a is opened, as shown in FIG. (1) The opening portion of the specified winning hole 65a is located. Thus, the ball enters the first specified winning hole 65a. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), a ball discharge port 65 c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the inside of the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball outlet 65c, the ball winning is detected and the winning balls are paid out, and the ball entered into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specified winning hole 65a. Can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball discharge port 65c, all the balls entering the first specified winning hole 65a enter the ball discharge port 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be discharged reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball which has flowed down the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 by right-handing and reached the second specified winning opening 650 a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a view in the case where the ball reaches the second specified winning opening 650a in a state in which the second specified winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specified winning hole 650a with the second specified winning hole 650a closed, the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. As a result, the upper part of the second specified winning hole 650a flows down and falls to the left of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14A). Then, the ball dropped to the left side of the second specified winning opening 650a flows down to the out port 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left of the second specified winning port 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specified winning hole 650a with the second specified winning hole 650a open, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the ball is placed on the extension of the flow path where it has flowed down. 2) The opening portion of the specified winning hole 650a is located. Thus, the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball discharge port 650c, the ball's winning is detected and the winning balls are paid out, and the ball entered into the second variable winning device 650 from the second specified winning hole 650a. Can be discharged. The bottom portion 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined in the direction of the ball outlet 650c, so all the balls entering the second specified winning hole 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be discharged reliably.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, the downstream structure of the ball outlet 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the special game state (big hit state), in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the ball enters the probability changing ball inlet 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the end of the jackpot, it is configured to shift to a special symbol oddity state. The probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two flow paths (the induction flow path 652 and the induction flow path 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the induction flow path 652). It is done. Further, at the upper end of the two flow paths, a flow path switching valve 650 d for setting a flow path in which the ball flows down is provided. The flow path switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow paths so that the ball can not move forward, and open the other flow path so that the ball can move forward. It is done. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated with the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17), and according to the elapsed time in the 12th round of the big hit Placement is switched.

  Fig.15 (a) and FIG.15 (b) are the figures which showed the operation | movement of the ball | bowl by arrangement | positioning of the flow-path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a view showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the induction flow path 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the induction flow channel 652 is closed, the ball entering the ball outlet 650c can not advance to the induction flow channel 652 by being blocked by the flow channel switching valve 650d. Thus, the ball travels to the induction channel 653 (see FIG. 15 (a)). Usually, a ball inlet 655 is provided downstream of the induction channel 653. That is, while it becomes the arrangement | positioning shown to Fig.15 (a), the ball can not be made to enter into the definite variation ball inlet 654. In the present embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650 d is configured as shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15 (b) is a view showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650 d is arranged to close the induction flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (excitation) the passage solenoid 611. In the arrangement for closing the induction flow channel 653, the ball entering the ball outlet 650c can advance to the induction flow channel 652 without being blocked by the flow channel switching valve 650d. Thus, the ball travels to the induction channel 653 and enters the ball ball ball 654 provided downstream thereof.

  By entering the ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654, it is set to shift to the special symbol in the definite variation state at the end of the big hit (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specified winning opening 650a is opened is finished, a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state after the big hit end to the player in the subsequent rounds is executed. That is, if the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds, the display effect suggesting transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol in 13 rounds to 15 rounds is the third symbol display device 81 Is executed in On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds, the display effect suggesting transition to the time saving state of the normal symbol in 13 rounds to 15 rounds is the third symbol display device 81 Is executed in As described above, by setting the round in which the large two special winning opening 650a is opened to the twelfth round, a sufficient period of time to execute the suggested effect suggesting the gaming state after the big hit ends in the remaining rounds of the big hit is secured. be able to.

  As described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the inlet of the storage device 600. The more easily it flows, the harder it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it will be difficult for the ball to enter the probability ball entry 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B. Conversely, the more easily the ball enters the storage device 600, the easier it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, so it is easier for the ball to enter the probability ball entry 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease of inflow of the balls into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the proportion of the balls into the probability ball inlet 654. Here, as a method of adjusting the ease of flow into the storage device 600, for example, adjustment of a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 may be mentioned. That is, as the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to be closer to each other, the ball is less likely to pass between these two nails, and thus the ball is less likely to flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter a ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it can be made easy to shift to the special variation state of special symbol. On the other hand, as the two nails provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 are adjusted to move away from each other, the ball can more easily pass between the two nails, so that the ball can more easily flow into the storage device 600 . Therefore, since it becomes easy for a ball to flow into the definite variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot B, it is possible to make it difficult to shift to a special variation of the pattern. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the inlet of the storage device 600, it is possible to change the specs of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio of the probability change state of the special symbol), so pachinko according to the sales policy of each hole. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of the big hit. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a is different in jackpot A and jackpot B. As a result, the jackpot B is configured to be more likely to enter the ball into the probability change ball entrance 654 in the special gaming state (jackpot state) than the jackpot A. The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specified winning opening 650a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650 a and the flow path switching valve 650 d in the 12th round of the jackpot A. The upper graph in FIG. 16 (a) shows the time change (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16 (a) The figure on the lower side shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction channel 652 on the left side downstream of the ball outlet 650c is open or the induction channel 653 on the right side is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the 12th round is started, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and is set to the open state based on the 7 seconds having elapsed. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, the ball is set to an open state until ten balls enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a or 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. Be done. Then, when the twelfth round is finished, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the 12 rounds of big hit next.

  Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650 d is set so that the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side is closed and the sphere can flow down the induction flow path 652 on the left side (FIG. 15). (B)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started, and based on passage of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and the sphere is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). In addition, since this switching operation is completed in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, it is possible to switch the flow path before the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained. The state in which the sphere can flow down in the induction channel 653 is the next big hit and continues until the end of the 11th round. Then, on the basis of the end of the 11th round and the interval period of 3 seconds, the ball is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, during most of the period during which the player is playing a game, the ball can pass through the guiding channel 653 provided on the right side of the channel switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the channel switching valve 650d. The sphere is set to be able to pass through the induction channel 652 from the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of the 12 rounds to the limited 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12 rounds Only for the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if an illegal act of entering the ball into the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is performed other than the 12th round of the special gaming state, the ball enters the ball ball 654 with certainty Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that the probability change state of the special symbol is illegally obtained.

  The timing of switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the state where the induction channel 652 is opened at the start of 12 rounds, or in the middle of the interval period set after the 11 rounds have ended (for example, after the interval starts) It may be configured to switch (when 0.5 seconds have elapsed). Thus, the period during which the induction flow path 652 is opened can be limited to a shorter period, so that the ball is illegally entered into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 while the second specified winning opening 650a is closed. Even if the ball is allowed to enter the ball, the ball can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball entrance 654. That is, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, a period in which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650 d is open, and the second specified winning opening (second large open opening) 650 a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so that the overlapping periods hardly overlap (they overlap only for 0.2 seconds immediately after the 12th round is started). Therefore, in many cases when it becomes the jackpot A, since the ball does not enter the definite insertion ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot), it becomes difficult to be set in the definite variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  In addition, in order to make it hard to understand that it is jackpot A immediately after the start of 12 rounds to open the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth (the 2nd large opening mouth) 650a in 0.2 seconds immediately after 12 rounds are started It is. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16 (b), the second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) immediately after the start of 12 rounds at the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry ball 654 ) 650a is released. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a immediately after the start of 12 rounds with the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the present jackpot is the jackpot B be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16 (b), the time change of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and FIG. 16 (b) The figure on the lower side shows the time change of the flow path switching valve 650d (whether the induction channel 652 on the left side downstream of the ball outlet 650c is open or the induction channel 653 on the right side is open). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the 12th round is started, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set in the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and is set to the closed state based on the elapse of 5 seconds. The second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is also when 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds. It is closed. This closed state continues until the special gaming state (big hit state) ends and the 12 rounds of big hit next.

  Further, as described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow path switching valve 650 d is set to perform an operation common to the jackpot A. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the 11th round, the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed to allow the sphere to flow down the left induction flow path 652 (See FIG. 15 (b)). Then, when 6.5 seconds pass after the 12th round is started, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched in the reverse direction. That is, the induction flow path 652 is closed by the flow path switching valve 650d, and the sphere is set to be able to flow down the induction flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15A). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the state (the state in which the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653) is maintained.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, a period in which the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is open, and the second specified winning opening (second large open opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is set so that the overlapping period is up to 5 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to enter the ball into the definite change ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the middle hit) in many cases when it becomes the big hit B, after the end of the big hit is set to a definite change state of the special symbol It will be easier.

  In addition, the open pattern of the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth (the 2nd large open mouth) 650a is not something which is limited to this, the pattern where the ball is easy to enter the ball to the definite deformation ball entrance 654, and the definite deformation ball entry 654 It may be set arbitrarily as long as it is possible to set a pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d can also be determined arbitrarily without being limited to the form of the present embodiment. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the ball can flow down the induction flow path 653 at the start of 12 rounds (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6.) The flow path switching valve 650d may be set to allow the sphere to flow down after the lapse of 5 seconds (see FIG. 15B).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Furthermore, the second specified winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds, and for example, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the 15th round. It may be set to As a result, the opportunity to enter the ball into the definite variation ball entrance 654 can be increased, so that it is possible to make the special symbol more likely to be in the definite variation state after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, despite having won the jackpot B, the ball can not enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the player's motivation for the game is reduced. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the out ports 603a to 603c is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are removed. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of the display result in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c. And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later along with the description of the first random number counter C1, but any of the judgment values specified in the first random number table 202a may be the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning combination If it matches, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type , And is specified in association with the type of the entrance that became the lottery trigger of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first collision type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" A jackpot A is associated with and defined (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the jackpot A, most of the period during which the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d It is comprised so that it may become the period which the flow path 653 is open | released (refer Fig.16 (a)). Therefore, it is difficult to cause the balls to flow down to the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650 d, so the spheres to the probability change ball inlet 654 provided downstream of the induction flow path 652 It will be difficult to enter the ball. That is, when it becomes the jackpot A, it becomes difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the jackpot B is associated with the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 2 in FIG. 18 (b)). As described above, in the case of the jackpot B, all of the periods in which the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round, the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d The channel 652 is configured to overlap with the open period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, the flow path switching valve 650d can be obtained simply by causing the ball to enter the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The ball can flow down to the induction channel 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, the positive change ball inlet 654 is provided downstream of the induction flow channel 652. Therefore, when it becomes jackpot B, it becomes easy to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Moreover, the jackpot B is matched and prescribed | regulated in the range whose value of the 1st type | classification counter C2 is "20-99". That is, the number of judgment values for the jackpot B is increased when the jackpot for the special symbol 2 is a jackpot compared to when the jackpot for the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. Therefore, the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of special symbol 2 is configured to be easy to become big hit B.

  As mentioned above, during the special symbol oddity, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd ball entrance 640, the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol state of the special symbol, it is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and the special symbol which is likely to be a big hit B if the terminal is big and the probability variation of the special symbol after the big hit is over Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in the state, is likely to be repeated, it is easy for the player to obtain a large number of winning balls. As a result, since it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the definite variation state of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)). Moreover, in the high probability state of a normal symbol, "5-204" is prescribed as a judgment value used as a hit of a normal symbol (refer 202 c 2 of FIG.18 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 34) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a winning on the first entrance 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) and a second ball input The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning in the mouth 640 is respectively provided, and in each of these areas, at the timing of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, In addition, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a definite variation state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which of the values "0 to 9" is the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired? It is determined that any of “0 to 9” is determined to be a jackpot. Among the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first "400 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is 10 pieces of "0 to 9", so the jackpot of the special symbol and the odds of the special symbol The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in the low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "200", and if it is "200", it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the random number counter C1 per first "400" of "0 to 399", the judgment value to be the big hit is only one piece of "200", so the special symbol is in the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the first random number table for low probability time, and the random number value for the big jack stored in the first random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number which is dislocated, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the disapproval of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1, and the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Moreover, it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1, and the big hit type in the case where the random number value is any of "50 to 99" becomes "big hit B". Furthermore, it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type when the random number value is any one of "0 to 19" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Moreover, it becomes a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 2, and the big hit type in the case where the random number value is any of "20 to 99" is "big hit B".

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpots are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, it is configured that the same jackpot type is selected by the value of the same first hit type counter C2 in the case where it became a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the case where it became the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 2 You may With such a configuration, the amount of data in the first type-based selection table 202b can be reduced, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A so-called short time deviation, a long time deviation, and a rough display mode such as normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 as described above. ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time use)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various types are defined as a deviation pattern for disengaging , "Normal reach" various types, "Super reach" various types are defined as the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 18 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) (refer to 202c1 of FIG. 18 (c)), and for normal symbol from its low probability and It is divided into two kinds, (for 202c2 reference in Fig. 18 (c)) for high probability (time period of normal symbol and time period which is special variation of symbol) with high probability of becoming The number of random numbers to be jackpots is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be different, the probability of becoming a hit between the low probability of the normal symbol (the normal state of the normal symbol) and the high probability of the normal symbol (the short time of the normal symbol) Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (202c1 of FIG. 18 (c) reference). As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the electric role object 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the short time of the normal symbol, and during the definite variation of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" . These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 of the normal symbol is The variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as “), and the electric role object 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened“ one second × two times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and furthermore, the open period of the electric symbol 640a is Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance ball hole 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is "one second x 2 times". Although it is open only, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 19, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Here, the details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 holding ball Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation effective flag 203o A definite variation effective timer 203p, an ejection number counter 203q, a short time counter 203r, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, the first entrance ball opening The values of the first random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 acquired based on the winning of 64 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning on the second entrance 640 are respectively stored. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination) 3) It is a counter which counts the number of balls held (number of standbys) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). ). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d in that the number of holding balls held in the second entrance 640 and stored is held. Since it is only different, the detailed description is omitted.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entry slot 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31) S703: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change status of the special symbol (during the probability variation of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when off, it indicates that the probability state of the special symbol is low. In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). Further, the probability change flag 203g is a big hit by drawing a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, in a state where the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power off occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is configured to be backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether to shift the gaming state to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball has entered the probability variation ball entrance 654 during the special gaming status (big hit status) . When the gaming ball enters the definite variation ball entry 654, the entering variation is detected by a non-illustrated probability variation switch, and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). Also, in the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has been passed before the power is shut off, and if it is determined that it is passing, the probability change setting flag 203h May be set to turn on formally and return. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the positive variation switch has been passed before the power is shut off can be determined depending on whether the positive variation passage counter 203i described later has a value larger than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203h is rewritten to ON and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have passed the probability variation switch in one round in the jackpot state (the 12th round of jackpots in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all gaming balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated when passing the probability variation switch (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after the processing of whether the number of gaming balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls is executed, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to zero.

  The winning number counter 203 j is a first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65 a of the first variable winning device 65 and a second specific winning opening of the second variable winning device 650 (second This is a counter for counting the number of balls entering the large open port) 650a. Specifically, based on the ball entering the ball being detected by the prize sensors (not shown) respectively provided to the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, it is added one by one and updated (S1403 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is over, the number (winning number counter 203 j) of winnings in the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65 a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a It is reset to "0", which is an initial value, after it is determined whether or not the discharged number (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) matches. The value of the winning number counter 203 j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to zero.

  As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, so in each round, the number-of-winnings counter 203j is substantially The number of balls entering the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the 12th round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, so in the 12th round, the winning number counter 203j substantially corresponds to the second specific winning opening (second The number of balls entering the large open port) 650a will be counted.

  In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the winning Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are entered respectively. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of spheres.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) an elapsed time after the induction flow path 652 provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the operation counter 203k counts (counts) an elapsed time after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to ON and the ball is set to the state in which the ball can enter into the ball socket 654. In the pachinko machine 10, the passage switching valve 650d is turned clockwise about the switching shaft 650e by turning on (excitation) the passage solenoid 611 based on the end of the 11 rounds of the big hit, The induction channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period during which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excitation) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to a total of 9.5 seconds of an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control unit 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow passage solenoid 611 is set to be off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is shut off. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is reset to 0, which is an initial value, by being initialized.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in one round. It shows that it was set from the closed state. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, a remaining ball timer 203n described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203 n is a counter for determining the time after the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65 a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650 a is closed, It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game balls having flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  In the remaining ball timer 203n, the first specified winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is closed (1 to 11 rounds, 13 to 15 rounds), or the second specified winning combination is finished. It is necessary for the game ball which has flowed into the inside of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds) It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, since the time required for the game balls to be paid out in the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is two seconds, it corresponds to three seconds (two seconds plus one second) to which a margin of one second is added. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203 n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203 n is updated and the value reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (rounds 1 to 11 and 13 to 15) or the second variable winning device 650 It is determined whether the number of winning prizes for (12 rounds) and the number of paid-out coins match (S1507 in FIG. 39). Then, if it is determined that the winning number and the discharging number do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be early notified that ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, and an impact etc. is given at the start timing of the 12th round of the next jackpot to make the ball enter the ball socket 654 with certainty. It can control cheating.

  In addition, when the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the probability change setting is made even if the ball enters the probability change ball entry 654. The flag 203 h may not be set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability change gaming state is provided illegally.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, either the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. Although updating of the counter value by the remaining ball timer 203 n is started when it is detected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The probability change valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the ball is to be validated when the game ball enters the probability change ball slot 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. It is. When the probability variation effective flag 203o is set to ON, the sphere that has flowed into the induction flow channel 652 (see FIG. 15B) is based on the fact that the flow channel solenoid 611 is turned on. It shows that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it indicates that entering the ball into the probability variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off by this probability variation effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period required to enter the probability variation ball port 654 normally. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball having flowed into the guiding channel 652 to enter the probability transformation ball inlet 654 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds added with a margin of 0.2 seconds. If the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654 after the lapse of 1.2 seconds, it is controlled that the definite variation setting flag 203h is not updated since there is a high possibility that some cheating has been made. .

  Thereby, in a state in which the flow path switching valve 650 d closes the induction flow path 652 (a state in which the ball is not guided to the probability change ball inlet 654), the ball is entered into the probability ball insertion 654 or a probability ball is inserted From the downstream of the mouth 654, push up the gaming ball with a piano wire etc. and make it pass through the probability change ball inlet 654, or cause damage due to fraud that false detection is made that the ball has entered the probability ball inlet 654 with radio waves etc. It can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203 q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. Each of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting discharge of a ball. Every time discharge of a ball is detected by the ball discharge port switch, the discharge number counter 203 q adds 1 to its value (see S 1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether or not the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the value of the number-of-discharges counter 203 q is an initial value Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining short time (the number of times the special symbol changes) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. At this time, the counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in this embodiment, when it is not set to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit game, the time saving state of the normal symbol of 100 times is provided.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222 a and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types (completely out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) of each fluctuation pattern are respectively set in counter values for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  Also, in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e The probability change state flag 223f, the short time state counter 223g, the large hit middle flag 223h, and the allowable time counter 223i are at least provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning), or the main controller 110 changes the special symbol in the special symbol Is executed, and the number of balls held is subtracted, a ball holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1908 in FIG. 43). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b based on the holding ball number command output from the main control unit 110 And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43) and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The definite change state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite change state of a special symbol. If this probability variation state flag 223 f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if off, it indicates that the probability probability state of the special symbol is. The probability variation state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). It is determined whether the present is a definite variation state of the special symbol according to the state of the definite variation state flag 223f, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the definite variation state of the special symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) It is determined whether or not to display.

  The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. At this time, if the short state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol, and if off, it indicates that the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the short state counter 223g is updated in accordance with the notification contents of the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). At this time, according to the state of the short state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5 (a)) displayed in the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) It is determined whether or not to display.

  The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state). If this jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a special gaming state (big hit state), if it is off a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) (special symbol oddity, ordinary) Indicates that the symbol is in the short time or normal condition). The jackpot flag 223h is set to ON when the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special gaming state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the large hit flag 223 h is set to OFF when the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S 1917 in FIG. 43). That is, when the special gaming state (big hit state) ends, it is set to off. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the jackpot flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navi image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) It is determined whether or not to display (see).

  Allowable time counter 223i is just before switching the state of storage valve 607a, to the guiding channel 606, or to any entrance (general winning opening 601 or general winning opening 602) the ball that has flowed into the guiding channel 607. It is a counter for counting the time until it enters the ball (ball out time). If the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602 by counting the ball swelling period, it is more accurately determined whether the ball entering is normal or not. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i sets a counter value corresponding to one second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). In addition, each time the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is executed, one is subtracted (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, with the storage valve 607a closed, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or when the storage valve 607a is opened, the general winning opening 601 is reached. When the ball enters the ball, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) is displayed. However, if the ball flows into the guiding channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. May. Similarly, if the ball flows into the guide channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the closed state to the open state, the ball enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a switches to the open state. May be a ball. In the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched in order to treat these as normal entering balls (without displaying a warning image), the allowable time counter 233i is switched to a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. When the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (the warning image is not displayed) until one second set as the counter value has elapsed. Is configured as.

  The number-of-winnings counter 223 j is a counter for counting the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the big hit. The value of the number-of-winnings counter 223 j is reset to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is set to 1 each time the jackpot information command corresponding to the entry into the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is received at the jackpot. Are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in this embodiment, the number of times the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the special gaming state (big hit state) is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 6 (a)). The number-of-winnings counter 223 j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of hits displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball entering the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image alternates with the third symbol display device 81 The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a town, a sea, the sky and the like are displayed. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored as a back surface image in the back surface image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, an opening data transfer flag A storage image data determination flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j are provided at least.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a which are normally closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state from now on. It is an effect, and a round effect is an effect for notifying a player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage," "empty stage" and "island stage") is displayed Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 59 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50 (b) (see S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) in which the contents of the instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later (see FIG. 24) describing the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2403), the pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 24), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 50B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3902 of FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment When each reaches 399, 99, 239), each clears to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210) A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. Moreover, in the case of the jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the jack off, the green LED is turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the 1 to 11 rounds and the 13 to 15 rounds, the first specified winning opening (first open opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won). In the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the process of S218 ends, a notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (judgement or rejection) and This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). If it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and for high probability On the basis of the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random values defined in the first random number table 202a. As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is made common in the lottery of special symbol 1 and the lottery of special symbol 2, according to the lottery of special symbol 1 or the lottery of special symbol 2 It may be a different random value. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the judgment value used as a big hit is set to the same number in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values to be the jackpot may be made different. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the probability change flag 203g is not on (that is, off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first hit random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which is the same match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes) , A jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the special symbol with two types (big hit Of A and jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big jack A, jack B). Further, in order to cause the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S308, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  As the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various kinds of “disengagement (for long time)”, “disengagement (for short time)”, “disappearing normal reach”, “divergence as a fluctuation pattern for detachment” There are various types of "super reach" and "special reach". In addition, as the fluctuation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, various “shared normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot B, “special reach” is specified. It is defined, and "common normal reach" various, "common super reach" various, and "common special reach" various types are specified as the variation pattern of the hit and the off common use.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, next, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (refer to FIG. 34), these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters, and performing a suspension process of the value.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the free holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 differ from each other only in that the process of holding the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are performed with the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are identical, their detailed description is omitted. Further, when each process of S407 to S412 is finished, the pre-reading process is executed (S413), and the present process is finished.

  Next, the prefetching process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S413). This pre-reading process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 If there is no new winning combination (S501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first winning slot 64 or the second entering slot 640 has a new winning (S501: Yes), whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite variation state of the special symbol or not If it is determined (S502) and the special symbol is in a definite variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  If it is determined in the process of S502 that the gaming state is not a definite variation of special symbol (S502: No), a lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Migrate to In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 which are the judgment results of the big hit are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640 It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time shortening state of the normal symbol is (S608: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol It is determined whether it is medium (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, in the special gaming state). That is, if it becomes easy to become a hit of an ordinary symbol, the ball that strikes the right easily enters the second entry port 640, so to the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a. And the ball will be difficult to reach. Therefore, during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the hit probability of the normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. There is.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not the hit is a normal symbol is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239" It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202 c 2 of FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see 202c1 in FIG. 18 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol short time state (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, like the low probability state of the normal symbol, The number of times of opening and the opening time of the motorized part 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, The opening period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second entrance port 640 is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S 618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S 622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S 622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S 622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S 623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S 618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol It determines (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640 a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S625, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is performed next. The control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is of the empty hold area (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Of these, the first area is stored (S 705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S911) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power supply recovery is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a definite variation state, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the number of time reductions of the normal symbol. A state command is generated in accordance with the value of the hour / minute counter 203 r and the state of the probability change flag 203 g and is output to the audio lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, recognition of the game state can be made to coincide between the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, despite the fact that the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5 (a)) is displayed despite the low probability state of the special symbol, or conversely, the player is in spite of being the definite variation state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5 (b)) is displayed when the user performs right-handed driving. That is, the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

  When the process of S 914 ends, a rendering permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S 915). Then, an interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control for opening or closing the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 The process is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, opening of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state. And set the closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a motorized item opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S1005). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set in the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S309, the first symbol display is a variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, in the first symbol display device 37 Ends the fluctuation display being executed, and stops the stop symbol (the first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). Display (light on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( Turn on).

  Next, based on the saved winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the winning information command set in the winning information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines the presence or absence of a malfunction in the storage valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is playing an unusual game (such as performing a left hit in a jackpot state, a left hit in a definite variation state of a special symbol, and the like).

  When the process of S1008 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252 and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1010: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the first specific winning It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 ends, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to be opened (S1103), and this process ends. As described above, when the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball entering the storage device 600 can flow down the guiding channel 607, so the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (15). It becomes possible to enter a sphere to 602 (see FIG. 9 (b)).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the gaming board 13. Since the player is in the special game state, the player is aimed at the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a to obtain a winning ball. A part of the ball enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the winning balls based on the ball entering the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a, a general winning provided in the storage device 600 A player can be made to win a winning ball based on entering a ball (large value winning hole) 602. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be acquired from the start to the end of the jackpot can be increased, so that the player can be made to play the game with a greater enjoyment of becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, a definite variation state of a special symbol or a short time state of a normal symbol is given. As described above, in these states, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right hitting. Do (I will try to receive a lottery of special symbol 2). This often allows the balls to flow into the storage device 600 before the next jackpot is initiated. Then, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set in the closed state, so that the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, the jackpot next becomes a jackpot, and when the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602. That is, immediately after the jackpot is started, the player can acquire a large number (15) of prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to secure the balls for playing the jackpot game without newly requesting the lending of the balls in a situation where the jackpot is won but the balls have run out.

  If the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1104: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress by the process of S1104 (S1104: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). And when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation for setting the operation of the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether it is the 12th round of jackpot that is newly started (S1201), not the 12th round (ie 1 to 11 rounds, and 13 to 15 rounds) If it is determined that it is either (S1201: No), then the opening of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Thus, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16 (a) is executed, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16 (b) is controlled. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, the induction channel 652 is set to be closed 6.5 seconds after 12 rounds are started. Next, the opening operation of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a read in the process of S1203 is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is finished, a round number command indicating a round to be newly started is set (S1206), and this process is ended. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the channel solenoid 611? It discriminates (S1107). If it is determined in the process of S1107 that the operation timing is reached (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the end of the 15 rounds which is the final round of the jackpot, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the ball that has flowed into the inside of is passed, it is judged as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined by the processing of S1108 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending processing is executed (S1109), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (refer to FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 ends, next, the storage valve 607a set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. Thus, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, the storage valve 607a prevents the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 from being blocked. It will not be possible to let the ball flow down. That is, since the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 having a small number of winning balls, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special gaming state (normal gaming state), by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, it is fundamentally an irregular game method that increases the number of balls only by the payout of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 In a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to play a game expecting to be a big hit by making a lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, as mentioned above, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if a right-handed hit is performed in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and the ball can not be increased by the payout based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of hitting the right in the normal state, and to allow the player to play a game with the aim of becoming a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

  In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball that has made a right strike enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, so a definite variation state of the special symbol or a normal symbol In the time saving state (that is, in the state where the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 provided on the right path of the game board 13 is easily released) It can be done. Therefore, despite the fact that the special symbol is in a definite variation state or the normal symbol is in a short time state, and the player moves to a state advantageous to the player, the ball holding number decreases rapidly and the state is advantageous. It can prevent (suppress) that the player can not feel it. Therefore, the game can be continued without loss of balls in the special symbol's definite variation state or the normal symbol's time saving state.

  The number of winning balls for entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be reduced (for example, one winning ball may be used). As a result, it is possible to more reliably suppress that the payout is too much and the ball is too large in the definite variation state of the special symbol or the time shortening state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the hole an unexpected disadvantage. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640), the merit of performing right hitting can be reduced.

  When the process of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303). When it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, the ball to the probability variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot Since this means that the ball has entered, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). By this, after the end of the jackpot, it shifts to a special symbol oddity state. After the processing of S1304, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), a state command including information indicating that the probability change state of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1303 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball did not enter the probability variation ball entrance 654 in 12 rounds of the jackpot. Then, in order to set the short term of 100 times of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot, the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is set to 100 (S1307). Then, a status command including information indicating that the time saving status has been set is set (S1308), and this processing ends. The state command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability change setting flag 203 h is on. If the probability change setting flag 203 h is on, the probability change flag 203 g is set on. That is, regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the definite variation ball entrance 654, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched. Therefore, the player can be expected to shift to the probability variation gaming state until the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if it is possible to enter the ball into the ball socket 654 in the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, so the special game state (d During state), it is possible to be interested in whether or not the ball enters the definite ball entrance 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1109: No), then, the first specified winning opening 65a, and the second specified winning opening 650a ball entry (winning) or probability change A winning process is performed to monitor the entry (winning) of the ball into the entrance 654 (S1111). Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether it is a period (round effective period) in which a round game is set (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period until the interval period (3 seconds) ends after opening of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a is set. If it is determined that it is out of the round effective period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a ( S1402). If it is determined in the process of S1402 that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403) , Shift the process to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not entered any of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1404. And transition.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the closing of the winning opening set in the open state among the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a Is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it is determined that the ball is being discharged for discharging the ball remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), a round time (30 in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of big hit ends. It is determined whether second) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the operation counter 203k is updated by decrementing by 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the definite variation ball inlet 654 (whether or not it has passed a probability variation switch not shown) (S1410) ). If it is determined that the ball has passed the probability change switch (S1410: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i to update it (S1411), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412), The process shifts to step S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the sphere has not passed the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413 executed after the process of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). When it is determined that it is not 0 (S1413: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1413 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the induction channel 652 is closed by setting the flow path solenoid 611 off (S1414), and the probability change is effective The flag 203o is set to on (S1415), and the process ends. By setting the probability change effective flag 203o to ON by the processing of S1415, even after the flow passage switching valve 650d is switched and the induction flow passage 652 is closed, the sphere remaining in the induction flow passage 652 is a probability change switch When passing through, the probability change setting flag 203h can be controlled to be set on (that is, a probability change state of a special symbol is given after a big hit).

  If it is determined in the process of S1408 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, off) (S1416: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2s in the present embodiment) (S1418), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes) The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). As a result, even if passage of the probability change switch is detected, control is performed so as not to update the value of the probability change setting flag 203h. As described above, when passage of the probability variation switch is detected after the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p becomes the upper limit value, it is highly possible that the detection is due to some fraudulent act. Therefore, by turning off the probability variation effective flag 203o, the update of the probability variation setting flag 203h is prohibited to control the fraud.

  When the process of S1419 ends, next, the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1420), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1418 that the value of the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit (less than the upper limit) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the probability variation switch, so the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time during which passage of the probability variation switch is determined to be effective, it is possible to suppress passing of the ball to the probability variation switch illegally and giving of the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, next, an abnormal process for detecting an abnormality occurring during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and the present process is ended. Here, the details of the abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1501), and when it is determined that it is out of a round effective period (S1501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 It discriminates (S1502). If it is determined that the ball has passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball exclusion counter 203s is incremented by one and updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being drained, so 1 is added to the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball discharging period. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203 n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, three seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specified winning opening 65 a or the second specified winning opening 650 a is set) If it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1505 that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (the value of the number-of-winnings counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of balls discharged matches the number of winnings (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ejected balls and the number of winnings do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an output of an error signal to the hall computer is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the injustice in which the game ball is made to remain illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and the probability changing switch passes the ball.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharged number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to initial values (S1511), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the winning information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the passage situation of the ball to the various winning openings (ball entrance).

  In the winning information command setting process, first, the winning detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether there is new winning detection information (whether there is a new entry for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603) This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that new winning detection information exists (S1602: Yes), a ball entry opening (winning opening) that detects the ball entry (winning) according to the new winning detection information. A prize information command including the information of is set (S1603). The prize information command is formed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each bit of 2 bytes is associated with each prize opening, out opening, and the like. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (ball entrance) at which the ball entered the ball (winning) is detected is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning port (ball opening) at which the ball is not entering is set to 0 After being set, it is output as a prize information command. When the process of S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the present process is ended.

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines, based on the prize information command, whether there is a defect in the intelligent storage device 600, whether the player is playing an irregular game, or the like. Then, when a failure or the like occurs, a display error command corresponding to the type of the failure is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display error command, the third symbol display device 81 reports an error.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is performed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1816 (see FIG. 42) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current startup process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1702). As described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1816. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1816 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1816 occurs It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. And from) it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is corrupted (S1703: Yes), and the process moves to S1704. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1516 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-off process of S1816. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is performed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is performed, the process of S1708 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1816 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1709), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). The permission is set (S1711), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1708 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1704 through S1706 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability change status flag 223f and the probability change status counter 223g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command received from the main control unit 110 (S1711), interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the main processing is performed. Transition. By updating the probability variation status flag 223f and the probability variation status counter 223g based on the status command, it is possible to match the gaming status recognized by the main control device 110 with the gaming status recognized by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the gaming state.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1709 is that, when the process of S1708 is reached via the processes of S1704 to S1706, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current S1801 process has been executed (S1801), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the process of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1802 to S1810, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S 1811 and the variable display setting process of S 1812 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1811 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802 ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1804). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1805 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1809 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S 1811). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S 1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S 1813 (S 1813: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S 1814) If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1814: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a command determination process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1811). This command determination process (S1811) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1907). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of variation display in special symbol), or the special symbol 2 holding ball of main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). Further, in the processing of S1908, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, when the ball has won the first ball entry 64 and the second ball entry 640 (start prize) from the main control unit 110, or when the lottery of the special symbol is performed As it is transmitted, every time a start winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 holding ball by the process of S1908 The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1908 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether a state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability change status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and this processing ends. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined based on the winning information command whether or not the ball has entered the ball normally, and an error is notified if there is a possibility of failure or injustice. An error notification process for performing the process is executed (S1912), and this process is ended.

  on the other hand. If it is determined in the process of S1911 that a winning information command has not been received (S1911: No), it is then determined whether an opening command has been received (S1913), and if an opening command has been received (S1911) S1913: Yes), while setting the jackpot flag 223h to ON, the counter value (1000) corresponding to one second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, a display opening command is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 displays an opening effect for notifying of the start of the big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of S1913 that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the large hitting medium flag 223h is set to off, and the value of the allowable time counter 223i corresponds to one second (1000). Is set (S1917), an end command for display is set (S1918), and this processing is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S1802) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 displays an ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1919) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of a failure or a fraud. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error notification process (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is on (S1931), and if on (S1931: Yes), among the winning information notified by the received winning information command It is determined whether or not the winning information to the first ball entrance 64 is included (S 1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information to the first ball entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), as a result of the player hitting the left despite the big hit, the first ball entrance 64 Means that the ball has entered the ball. That is, the player is performing a game method (how to strike) in which the ball is difficult to enter the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a despite the special gaming state (big hit state), It means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to cause the player to obtain a prize ball in the special gaming state (big hit state), a display error command corresponding to the left hitting warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and processing To step S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. The left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) makes it possible to urge the player making a left strike in the special gaming state (big hit state) to perform a right strike. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing and to obtain the winning balls more reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1932 that the prize information command does not include the prize information corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (S1932: No), the process of S1933 is skipped and processed. To step S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934). The hit notification process for giving a notification when it is present is executed (S1935), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the flash period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state Since this means that the process has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and this process ends. That is, when the ball which has flowed (advanced) into the guiding flow channel 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the flash stroke period. To prevent it from being judged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1931 that the big hit medium flag 223h is not on (is off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined that it is 0 (S1936: Yes), a notification is given when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a at normal time (any of special variation of symbol, time variation of normal symbol, and normal condition) In step S1937, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit Since this means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the processing of S1937 is skipped, and the present processing ends. That is, when the ball which has flowed (advanced) into the guiding channel 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed, the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 during the ball pouring period. To prevent it from being judged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the hit notification process (S1935) for giving a notification when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit notification process (S1935).

  In the hit notification process (S1935), first, in the winning information command determined to be received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is entered. It is determined whether the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). And, if the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the jackpot that the storage valve 607a should be set to the open state Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guiding channel 606. That is, the storage valve 607a is not opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a or the like, and as a result that the state in which the ball is stored to the upper part of the storage valve 607a continues, the ball can be guided to the guiding channel 606 There is sex. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In addition, the ball that has flowed into the guiding channel 606 may enter the out port 603a disposed on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, but the ball may enter the out port 603a. Regarding the corresponding winning information, it is not a determination target whether or not a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a. This is because, among the balls flowing into the induction channel 606, the proportion of the balls flowing down to the out port 603a is small, and the majority enters the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, and the big hit Since a large amount of balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred by monitoring the general prize winning opening (small value winning prize opening) 601. In addition, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the player has entered the out port 603a by determining only the prize information corresponding to entering the general prize port (small value winning port) 601. The processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1941, when it is determined that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is not included (S1941: No), next, the received prize information command is It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the prize entry (large value prize entry) 602 is included (S1943), and the prize corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (large value prize entry) 602 If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image during the big hit according to the value of the winning number counter 233 j after update, a display rear image change command is set (S 1945).

  The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the display content of the winning number display area MA is updated in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. More specifically, update is performed after an image for which the number of hits (number of EXTRA BONUS hits) to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 shown in FIG. An image shown in FIG. 6 (a) corresponding to the subsequent number of ball entry is displayed. By displaying the number of hits for the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot on the number-of-winnings display area MA, entering the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a in the jackpot The player can be made aware of the number of times he has won the prize ball separately. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the number of times of entering the ball at the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 increases. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when ball entry information corresponding to entering a ball into the general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 is included, it is determined that the storage valve 604a has a malfunction. However, the display error command may be set also when the prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the entry of the ball into the out port 603a. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, a notification is given when there is a failure in storage valve 607a at a normal time (any of a special symbol, a variation of a normal symbol, a short time of a normal symbol, and a normal condition). The normal notification process will be described. In this normal notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined not to be on (S1951), the present is not a probability variation state of special symbol (S1951) Since this means that the special symbol is in a low probability state), it is then determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is neither a definite variation state of a special symbol nor a time shortening state of a normal symbol (a normal state) means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether the player is hitting the right and whether or not the operation of the storage valve 607a has a problem, first, a general winning opening (large value is received in the received winning information command). It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the prize entry port 602 is included (S1953). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not the special gaming state (big hit state) Is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, or the player is entering the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in an incorrect manner. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and the present process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the state where the storage valve 607a remains open due to a problem, the balls flowing into the guiding channel 607 are out ports 603b disposed on the left and right of the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. , 603c may also enter the ball, but with regard to the winning information corresponding to the ball entering the out ports 603b, 603c, it is not a determination target of whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because the percentage of the balls flowing down to the out ports 603b and 603c among the balls flowing into the guiding channel 607 is small, and the majority enters the general winning port (high value winning port) 602. By monitoring the general winning combination (large value winning combination) 602, it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a problem has occurred. In addition, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the player has entered the out port 603b or 603c by determining only the prize information corresponding to entering the general prize port (large value winning port) 602. As it becomes better, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S1953 that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entry to the mouth (small value prize opening) 601 is included in the prize information command (S1955), and when it is determined that it is not included, this processing is ended as it is .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize entry (small value prize entry) 601 is included in the prize information command (S1955: Yes), normal time (a special symbol oddity, It means that the player is making a right strike despite the time saving state of the normal symbol and the normal state. In other words, it means that the player is playing a game by a game method in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entry port 640 and there are few opportunities to receive the special symbol lottery. Therefore, in this case, the game is displayed by displaying a right strike warning image (see FIG. 5B) prompting the player to aim at the first ball entrance 64 by left strike. It is possible to prevent the person from losing and to receive the lottery of the special symbol 1.

  If it is determined in the process of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 in the process of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included in the winning information command (S1957). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1957 that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), the special gaming state (big hit state) is not Nevertheless, it means that the sphere has flowed to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, there is a possibility that the player illegally causes the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 while the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the storage valve 607a is closed. high. Therefore, in this case, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and the present process is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 607a has a failure in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry to the general prize winning opening (large value winning prize opening) 602 is included. However, the display error command may be set also when the prize information command includes the prize information corresponding to the entry into the out port 603b or 603c. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and reliably determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1812). This variation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2006. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2006: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, S2007 to S2013. The respective processes are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is directly changed as it is in the third symbol display device 81. It sets as a stop classification (S2008). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the short time state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and if it is determined not to be greater than 0 (ie, 0) (S2010: No), shift the processing to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 203g after subtraction is 0 (S2012), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S2012), the normal state (low) of the normal pattern to the normal pattern (low) Since this means switching to the probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued, so the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol There is no need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  The back image displayed in the short time state is specifically a back image on which the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is finished, the type is switched to the rear face type in which the right-handed navigation is displayed regardless of the type of the jackpot. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished, it is switched to the back image for the normal state in which the right-handed navi is not displayed. In addition, when it becomes the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, the definite variation state of the special symbol continues until the jackpot becomes the next, so it is not changed from the back type where the right-handed navigation is displayed.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014). If it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 After subtraction and updating (S2015), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and the present process is ended. By the processes of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated regularly.

  In this embodiment, although the back surface type set by the definite variation state of a special symbol and the time shortening state of a normal symbol is made common, you may display a different back surface type, respectively. Thus, various effects can be realized. Further, the remaining short time period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the remaining short time.

  In the present embodiment, although the allowable time counter 223 h is updated in the variable display setting process (S 1812), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be configured to be updated in processing (sound editing / output processing, liquid crystal effect execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). As a result, the allowable time counter 223h can be updated periodically.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2202, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2202, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2203). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2201) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2201. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2202, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2103, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2104, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2105). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the simplified command determination process (FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. 50 (b) (see S2408) and the simplified display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2105, interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2106, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S 2301), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern, not the power-on image. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table A table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2404). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is configured based on the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409). While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2404), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405) The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2407, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the “off” or “chance” is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2408) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2409) is executed to shift to the process of S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2502). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed Then (S2505), the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52A, details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described. FIG. 52 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2601 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2603. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2605). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2605, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2602. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2604, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S2701), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S2703), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S2703 and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2702.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2506 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S2508), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2801 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2802 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the opening command processing is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display number-of-rounds command has been received, there will be a lot of waiting between the end of the opening effect and the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effecting to the start of the ending effecting As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for round effect and ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2508 that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S2510: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the round number command process (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2905), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2510 that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55 (a), the details of the rear image change command processing (S2515) will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101) . Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type, the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on, and the rear surface image corresponding to other rear surface image types The determination flag is set to off (S3102), the rear image change command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3102. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3102 At that time, specify the back image type to be displayed, and further specify the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236?) And the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S 2514 that there is no rear image change command (S 2514: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S 2516) For example (S2516: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

  In the process of S2501 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), The processing of S2502 to S2518 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 52 (a)) and the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 52 (b)) which are processing corresponding to each command, other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S3301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3302), S3303 to S3304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3304).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S3401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the explanation will return to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3303 (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  At S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information (S3502). As a result, if it is the End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set to 233 d is set to the clock counter 233 h (S 3504), the pointer 233 f is set to 1 for initialization (S 3505), and this processing is ended and displayed Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3506) ), End this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address of the end information is described. Since the drawing content is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3306 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is on (S3309: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3310), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S3314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S3315. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3316: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. The content is set to 233 d (S3317), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3321), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the opening command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2409) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 50B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect based on the power-on time fluctuation image is finished A process of setting a display data table defining display is set in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (b).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S3601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 is the resident video RAM 235 Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 59 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S 3702). In the process of S3702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3702 (S3702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Further, as a result of the process of S3701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3703, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 50B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3802 (S3802: No), the process of S3803 and S3804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3805: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3806 (S3806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the processing of S3805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3805: No), the processing proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal) The start address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to the process of S3813.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S 3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233 i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3813 (S 3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405) (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 3902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 50B) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning openings (the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state (big hit state) ), And is configured to open one of the winning openings according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning openings is configured as a winning opening in which a large number (15) of winning balls are paid out when the ball enters the ball. Further, two types of winning openings (a first specific winning opening 65a and a second specific winning opening 650a) are all provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. In this way, the ball can be made to enter even if any winning opening is opened only by striking the ball to the right of the gaming board 13 during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special gaming state (big hit state) can be made less dependent on the skill of the player, so that the player can enjoy playing the game with ease even if the player is a beginner.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, among the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) A storage device 600 provided with a plurality of winning openings on the upstream side is disposed. The storage device 600 is configured such that when the player strikes the right, a part of the hit balls can flow into the inside, and the balls that flow into the different winning openings A plurality of flow paths are provided for flowing down. Specifically, the number of winning balls is compared with the guiding channel 606 for letting the balls flow down to the general winning opening (small winning hole) 601 having a relatively small number of winning balls (three winning balls). A guiding flow path 607 for letting the ball flow down to a general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a large number (15 winning balls) is provided. Since the number of winning balls that can be obtained can be varied according to the type of the guiding flow path flowing down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the flow path of the ball flowing down to the player The type can be observed with interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, storage capable of closing the guiding channel 607 for causing the balls to flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls (15 winning balls). A valve 607 a is provided in the induction channel 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special game state (during the jackpot state), and is set to the closed state during the other game states. In addition, the gaming balls having flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged such that the respective guiding flow paths are easier to flow into the guiding flow path 607 than the guiding flow path 606 (FIG. 9 (see FIG. b) see). Therefore, in addition to the fact that winning balls can be obtained by entering a ball into the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a in the special gaming state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the guiding channel 607 A winning ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the selected general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a, and the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, only by the player hitting the right. It is because a ball can be made to enter to either of and storage device 600. As a result, since it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one special gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to enhance the player's merit by becoming a big hit. Therefore, since the player can be made to play the game with greater enjoyment of becoming a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and if the lottery result is a lottery result to win, a specific winning opening is opened and the specific winning opening is opened. There exist some which provide a lot of award balls based on a ball entering a ball (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177). In this conventional game machine, in addition to a specific winning opening, a plurality of winning openings are provided, and by making a specific winning opening and another winning opening adjacent, a specific winning opening can be obtained. Some are configured so that a ball hit and aimed can enter any of the specific winning opening and the other winning openings. Here, it is common to control so as to close a specific winning opening with a certain number of balls entering the specific winning opening as one of the triggers, so the number of entering balls for a specific winning opening As the ball enters the other winning opening before the number becomes a specific number, the number of winning balls that the player can win at the hit increases. Therefore, the number of winning balls in a hit can be increased by bringing a specific winning opening and another winning opening adjacent to each other, so that the player's expectation for the hit can be further improved.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, even in situations other than wins, there may be occasional anomalous gaming methods in which winning balls are obtained by striking out the ball and aiming at another winning opening adjacent to a specific winning opening. The

  On the other hand, in the state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage flow path 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, since it is possible to store one ball in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide channel 607, the storage device 600 is firstly closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The ball which has flowed into the interior of the valve is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. And when a ball flows in to storage device 600 in the state where a ball was stored by the upper part of storage valve 607a, as a result of a flow-down direction changing by colliding with a stored ball, a ball goes to induction channel 602 It becomes easy to flow down (see FIG. 9 (b)). Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. Therefore, the merit of entering the ball into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, fundamentally making the extraordinary game method of increasing the number of balls only by the payout of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 completely ceased In a state other than the gaming state (big hit state), it is possible to play a game expecting to be a big hit by making a lottery of a special symbol.

  In addition, in the storage device 600, one ball is configured to enter approximately three of the right-handed balls. The number of winning balls to be paid out when entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is three. That is, even if right-handed execution is performed in a gaming state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbol lottery to be made, and the payout based on entering the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 You can not increase the sphere by As a result, it is possible to eliminate the merit of hitting the right in the normal state, and to allow the player to play a game with the aim of becoming a big hit by drawing a special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the induction channel 606 enters the general winning hole (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the induction channel 607 enters the general entrance 602 Although it is comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, a well-known Kroon device provided with a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different winning balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. It is also good. As a result, even if the guiding flow channel 606 flows down, many winning balls can be obtained by entering the winning opening with a relatively large number of winning balls paid out. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly until the ball entering the storage device 600 enters any one winning opening. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage flow channel 607 is closed by the storage valve 607 a so that the sphere can be stored in the middle of the guide flow channel 607. However, for example, the induction flow channel using an electromagnet or the like You may comprise so that a ball may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow passage 607, and in a state other than the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the electromagnet is magnetized by being energized. As a result, the ball first flowing into the guiding channel 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for embedding the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Thus, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the induction flow channel 607 is increased (for example, in FIG. 8, the branching member 604 and the storage valve 607 a are eliminated). The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion immediately below and a general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 may be provided immediately below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Furthermore, if there is a ball that has been drawn down by the electromagnet and stopped flowing down, the electromagnet stopped by the ball in contact with the electromagnet part is changed and the flowing direction is changed, whereby the electromagnet is not embedded. It may be configured to flow down the part and flow down in a direction different from the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Then, a general winning hole (small value winning hole) 601 may be disposed below the portion of the guiding flow passage 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. Thus, the branching member 604 can be eliminated, and the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a was made into one ball, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that two or more spheres can be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide channel 607, and when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere may not be able to flow into the guide channel 607. By having a configuration in which the ball is not stored, even if the player strikes right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600.

  In the first embodiment, in particular, in the high probability state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot, or in the short time state of the normal symbol, the second ball inlet 640 is easily opened. In addition, in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the start winning to the second entrance 640), compared with the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the starting winning to the first entrance 64), It is easy to become a jackpot B that is advantageous to people. Therefore, when the jackpot is over, the player strikes the ball in an attempt to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the right. Therefore, for example, when the short period of time of the normal symbol is finished, the balls are stored in the storage device 600 with high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been lost. On the other hand, the storage valve 607a is provided at the upper end of the guiding channel 607, and the ball is not stored in the storage device 600, thereby making it possible for the player to feel that the ball has been used up without waste. . Thus, the player can be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, 602 and the out ports 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the second ball entrance 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entry port 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the right path (flow path) of the gaming board 13 is transferred to the inside of the storage device 600. May be Further, in this case, as the opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the drawing of the special symbol is executed 1000 times without becoming a big hit after the end of the big hit. May be

  In this way, when the drawing of the special symbol is executed 1000 times after the end of the big hit, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 by performing a right strike, so the special symbol 2 The lottery can be run. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 is five, but in the case of this modification, three payouts are made. It should be configured to be That is, since the number of balls that can enter the storage device 600 when hit to the right is 1 ball per 3 balls, it is possible to hit the right after the storage valve 607a is opened, It is possible to enter the second ball entry port 640 at a rate of one per three balls. That is, it is possible to receive the lottery of the special symbol 2 while maintaining the holding ball. By configuring in this way, it is expected that the storage valve 607a will be opened, even if the drawing of the special symbol is repeated without making a big hit (so-called, even if a big hit has occurred) Can be done. Therefore, even if the period in which the jackpot does not occur is prolonged, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. In addition, by increasing the number of award balls paid out when entering the second entrance ball entrance 640 (for example, 10), the storage valve 607a is opened and thereafter the ball is hit only by hitting the right. It may be configured to increase. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further increase the merit in the case of being separated continuously 1000 times or more in the lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, after the end of the big hit, I hope that it will be a big hit again with a small number of special symbol lottery times, if you continue to fall out of the special symbol lottery, to continue falling out of the special symbol lottery 1000 times or more continuously I can make you wish. Furthermore, after opening the storage valve 607a, the ball increases just by hitting the right, so by continuing to fall out of the drawing of the special symbol, the ball is held by the payout for entering the second ball entry port 640 It can be hoped that the condition that continues to increase will last for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to request the player to be a big hit of the special symbol or to keep losing the special symbol lottery depending on the number of times of drawing the special symbol, thereby providing the player with novel playability. Can.

  In the present embodiment, only one storage valve 604a is provided in the storage device 600, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide flow channel 606 may be branched in two directions, and one flow channel may be provided with a storage valve opened only during the special gaming state (during the jackpot state). That is, on the downstream side of the guiding channel 606, a configuration similar to that of the guiding channels 606 and 607 and the branching member 604 may be further provided. Then, a general winning hole with a large number of winning balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on the side where the storage valve is provided, and the number of winning balls is small in the flow path where the storage valve is not provided 3) General prize winning opening may be provided. By configuring in this way, a larger number of balls can be stored in storage device 600, so the special gaming state (big hit state) is started, and storage is performed by opening each storage valve. The balls that were being played can be simultaneously dropped to a general winning opening with a large number of winning balls (for example, 15). Therefore, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot can be increased. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. Also in this configuration, as in the case where a plurality of storage valves are provided, it is possible to further increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained in one jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, and the first variable winning device downstream of the storage device 600. The second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. However, the present invention is not limited to this arrangement, and any arrangement may be employed. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be disposed upstream of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), a ball hit to enter the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650 is the second ball entering first. There are cases where it becomes difficult to enter the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a, but the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a By arranging on the upstream side, it is possible to obtain winning balls more smoothly in the special game state (during the jackpot state).

  Further, by arranging the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a on the upstream side, by arranging the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a on the upstream side of the storage device 600, the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the ball enters the ball only at 600 and it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. Thus, each round in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state) can be progressed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second specified ball entry port 640 are provided as entrances for lottery of special symbols, but either one may be eliminated. For example, the second ball entry port 640 may be eliminated, and the motorized role object 640 may be provided to the first ball entry port 64. As a result, the merits of striking the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the state other than the special gaming state (big hit state) are reduced, so the anomaly for striking the storage device 600 Can be prevented (suppressed) more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when the ball flows into the storage device 600 (enters the ball), the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in which many prize balls are paid out. In addition to this, in one special gaming state (big hit state), the number of balls entering the general ball entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It may be configured to In this way, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to obtaining the winning balls by winning to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, to obtain extra extra winning balls The player can be made aware of whether the Therefore, since it is possible to make more balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is possible to have a target of the number of entering balls. The number of winnings on the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 need not necessarily be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display may be provided separately. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, effects during the jackpot state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In this embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the first specified winning opening 65a (winning), and the ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a (winning) Although the number of award balls to be paid out based on the number and the number of award balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (winning) is the same number (15) Not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of a ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is given to the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a. May be configured to be less than the number of winning balls to be paid out based on entering a prize (winning) (for example, 10). As a result, as a result of the advancing direction of the ball being biased in the special gaming state (big hit state), even if the ball flows into the storage device 600 alone, the disadvantage for the hole can be reduced.

  In addition, contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the common winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (winning), the first specified winning opening 65a, and the second specification It may be configured to be larger than the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the ball entering (winning) the winning opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a is 10, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the ball 602 (winning) may be fifteen. Thereby, the player can enjoy more benefits by flowing the ball into the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state), thereby further improving the interest of the player in the jackpot game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the jackpot. However, the trigger for opening and closing the storage valve 607a Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened only for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state multiple times in the jackpot. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between rounds of the jackpot, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the number of award balls to be paid out in one jackpot is too large. That is, since it is possible to prevent variations in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one jackpot, it is possible to easily predict sales of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, it is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the interval period (that is, in a state where the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a are closed). A portion of the sphere that has reached the downstream of the path (flow path) can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, even in the interval period, winning balls can be obtained by entering the balls into the general winning opening 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted even in the interval period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. Thereby, part of the balls remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, winning balls can be obtained by entering a ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending effect. Furthermore, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is finished, and the storage valve 607a is closed after the fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) It may be configured to switch to the state. Thereby, part of the balls remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect can be made to flow into the storage device 600. That is, the winning ball can be acquired by entering the ball into the general winning opening 602 after the ending effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the ball less likely to be wasted after the end effect.

  In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened in response to the setting of a gaming state different from the special gaming state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is changed when changing from the set gaming state to another gaming state. May be closed. For example, the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during a period in which the probability variation state of the special symbol is set. Thus, in the special symbol oddity state, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to become a big hit B by right-handed, the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a large number of prize balls to be paid out Can be entered. Therefore, the probability variation state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is a state in which the player has less merit compared to the probability variation state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the time reduction state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the time saving state of the normal symbol occurs.

  Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the gaming state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the gaming state etc, of the storage valve 607a at any timing of the player. It may be configured to switch states. Thus, each player can play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his / her preference.

  In the present embodiment, the out port is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the out port, a winning port may be provided in which a winning ball is paid out. In addition, the number of winning balls to be paid out may be made different by entering the ball into each winning opening. More specifically, for example, the winning opening is provided with six winning openings instead of the out opening 603a, the winning opening is provided with ten winning balls instead of the out opening 603b, and the winning opening is provided instead of the out opening 603c. There may be 12 winning openings. This makes it possible to more interestingly observe when the ball flows down the induction channel 606 or to which winning opening the ball enters the induction channel 607. In addition, a member capable of changing the flow-down direction of the ball such as a nail may be provided downstream of the guiding flow channel 606 or the guiding flow channel 607, and the winning opening on which any ball enters may be more random. . In this way, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the ball until the ball enters the winning opening. Further, by providing a nail or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry port where a ball can easily enter the ball by a store clerk in the hall. Therefore, the ball-fall rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the hole side.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the ending command is received. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (release state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state) in any state other than the special game state (big hit state). Although it was configured to do, it is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. Also, it may be configured to switch based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to execute a lottery whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. It is also good. When the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set in the open state (release state) by winning the lottery, the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 Because the player can enter the ball, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of winning more lotterys for the player. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, depending on the jackpot type, the jackpot (big hit B) that the second specified winning opening 650a is opened at the timing when it is easy to enter the ball exit 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type There is a big hit (big hit A) in which the second specified winning hole 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the mouth 654, but either is displayed by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. It may be configured to indicate whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of the 1 round to 11 rounds of the jackpot, an arrangement may be made in which a friend of justice and a monster fight. And if the allies of justice win by 11 rounds, it will be notified that it is jackpot B, and when the allies of justice are defeated, it may be constituted so that it may be notified that it is jackpot A. That is, when the ally of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to a special variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the result of the presentation performed in the jackpot.

  It should be noted that there is a high probability that the allegations of justice have a high degree of expectation (the case of jackpot B is likely to be selected) with a high degree of expectation that the allies of justice will win. And may be provided. For example, justice allies attack enemies with their own special techniques, or they are configured to have a high expectation of winning if justice allies avoid enemy attacks, so that justice allies off attacks. It may be configured to be more likely to be defeated if the enemy attacks with a special move. This makes it possible to predict the outcome not only as a result of whether or not the justice allies wins, but also in the flow of presentation leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest for the player's jackpot game.

  In addition, the contents of the rendition performed by the 11th round are not limited to the rendition where the allies of justice and the monsters mentioned above fight, and can suggest the advantageous jackpot B and the jackpot A which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B. It is sufficient if it is an aspect. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that it is a jackpot B, and the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of eating gluttony and to be notified that it is a jackpot B if all the provided food is consumed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, a condition under which the storage valve 607a is opened, a merit when it is opened, and a disadvantage when the ball is hit in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) which demonstrates may be displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the right strike is performed in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and it is detected that the ball has entered the storage device 600, the right strike warning image Although it is configured to display (see FIG. 5B), it may be configured not to display a right-handed warning image under predetermined conditions. For example, in the case where the player is performing a right strike while the ball is not stored at the upper part of the storage valve 607a, the right strike warning image (FIG. 5B) until the ball is stored at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. You may be configured not to display the reference. By setting the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, it becomes a big hit of a special symbol after that, and when the storage valve 607a is set in the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a The ball stored therein can be immediately entered into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used for a jackpot game. Therefore, even if the ball is exhausted despite the jackpot, it is possible to play the jackpot game without borrowing a new ball.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is disposed inside the storage device 600 in the special gaming state (big hit state). It is configured that a winning ball can be obtained by entering the ball into the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the winning balls being paid out by causing the balls to enter the first specified winning hole 65a and the second specified winning hole 650a, the ball to the storage device 600 The ball was configured to be paid out by entering the ball. As a result, in the jackpot, more prize balls are paid out, and the interest for the player's jackpot game is further improved.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball is closed by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the storage valve 607a. Is configured to be difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and is configured to be able to store the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 607a. When the ball stored in the storage device 600 exists in the normal gaming state, interference (contact) between the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 becomes possible. It was configured as. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored ball occurs, the flow-down direction of the ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. It was configured to change (in the direction of the induction channel 606). In this way, it is anomalous to try to increase holding balls without going through the jackpot by hitting the ball right aiming at winning the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 of the storage device 600 in the normal gaming state. It was configured so that the gaming method would not be realized fundamentally.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not the ball is stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the operation of the player. In addition, when the ball is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the ball can flow down are provided, and the flow-down speed or approach angle of the ball flowed into the storage device 700, the adjustment condition of the nail, etc. The ball is configured to be able to flow into either flow path.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a winning opening that easily enters the ball in a state where the ball is not stored (a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened) and two flow paths that easily flow in the state in which the ball is stored in the storage valve 704a. The two types of winning openings respectively provided downstream of are configured such that the numbers of winning balls to be paid out are all different. That is, two types of winning openings that can be won when the ball is stored in the storage valve 704 a become a winning opening with a large number of winning balls to be paid out by one, and a winning opening with a small number of winning balls by the other. It is configured as follows. In addition, the winning opening where the ball can win in a state in which the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be intermediate between the two types of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the player can enter even a winning opening with a large number of winning balls and a small winning opening, and a state in which an average payout can be stably received by making the balls flow into the storage device 700 Can. Therefore, since it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is made to flow into the storage device 700 according to the preference of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entrance 64, 2 A point that the variable winning device 650 is abolished, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and a release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. Are performed, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially modified, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes Partial processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 A point that has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. Then, the second variable winning device 650 provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is eliminated. The first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of the jackpot. That is, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the ball can be made to enter the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing left strike.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided on the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. In the storage device 700, the number of nails in the vicinity of the inlet thereof is smaller than that in the vicinity of the inlet of the storage device 600 according to the first embodiment, and the ratio of spheres inflowing when hit to the right is the storage device of the first embodiment It is configured to be less than 600 (e.g., 1 ball per 10 balls). The details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed to the third symbol display device 81 in the special symbol odd variation state or the normal symbol short time state (period in which the player does not lose even if right-handed) FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows the display content in the state where the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and in FIG. 63 (b), the release button 800 is pressed. The display content in the state (the state in which the storage valve 704 a is open) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the release button 800 is not pressed (operated by the player), the boy's character 710 in the first embodiment (FIG. 5 (FIG. Instead of Ds2) in a), the letters "Open the gate! when the button is pressed" is displayed. By displaying this character, the storage valve 704 a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 can be set in the open state by pressing the release button 800 (button) to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, about the display content in display area other than small area | region Ds2, since it is the same as the definite variation state of the special symbol in 1st Embodiment, and the time saving state of a normal symbol, it abbreviate | omits about the detailed name description.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the character of "gate open" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guiding channel 707 for flowing down the sphere that has flowed in from the upper part, and on the downstream side of the guiding channel 707, three channels are provided. (The downstream of the induction channel 707 is branched in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing down the inflowing ball in the lower left direction of the front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing down in the front view lower direction, and the lower flow direction of the front view And an induction channel 708 for the purpose. As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the downstream side of the induction channel 705, the ball is located to the right or left while flowing down the induction channel 705. Even by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flow direction of the ball can be corrected to the center. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction channel 705 can easily flow into the induction channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the induction channel 705.

  Downstream of the guiding channel 706, there are provided (for example, six) general winning openings (high value winning openings) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. In addition, in the downstream of the induction channel 704, the number of prize balls to be paid out compared to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is small (for example, three) general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 It is provided. Furthermore, as a ball entry port other than the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 702, the out-openings 703a to 703e are not paid out even if the ball enters the ball. It is provided. And, since the game ball which has flowed down the induction channel 708 enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or the out port (small value winning port) 703e, when the ball flows down the induction channel 708 There is no merit for the player at all. A ball that has flowed down the induction channel 706 but did not enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. Be done. In addition, the ball that has flowed down the induction channel 704 but did not enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703 b or the out opening 703 c. Be done. Even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration etc., these out ports 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from being deposited below the storage device 700 and reliably discharge the balls. Can.

  A storage valve 704 a is provided in the guide channel 704. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a stores one ball in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a after closing the induction flow channel 704, thereby closing the guide flow channel 704. be able to. Unlike the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured so that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the player operating the release button 800 (see FIG. 67). It is done. In the state in which the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704, the flowing direction is changed by an impact due to the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interfering with (in contact with) the stored ball. The change (switching) in the flowing direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the trajectory (flowing direction) of the ball when the ball that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 flows down while the storage valve 704 a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65 (a), the case where a sphere that has interfered (contacted) with a stored sphere repels to the left in front view due to an impact of interference will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the sphere that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ball rebounds in the left direction of the front view, The ball flows into the induction channel 706 and flows down the induction channel 706. Here, since the general winning a prize opening (large value winning a prize opening) 702 is provided downstream of the induction channel 706, a relatively large amount of balls can be entered into the general winning a prize winning opening (a high value winning a prize opening) 702. For example, six prize balls are paid out. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player if the ball rebounds to the right.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65 (b), a case where a sphere that has been stored in a state of interference (contact) with a stored sphere repels to the right in front view due to the impact of the interference will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the sphere that has entered (entered) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, it repels to the right in front view, The ball flows into the induction channel 708 and flows down the induction channel 708. Here, since the out ports (small value winning port) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the ball enters one of the out ports. That is, when the ball rebounds to the right in the front view, the winning balls are not paid out, so there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, in a state where the storage valve 704 a is closed, the number of winning balls (game value) obtained by the player fluctuates depending on the direction in which the ball that has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 rebounds. Therefore, in the case where the sphere flows into the storage device 700 (enters the sphere), it is expected that the sphere will be repelled in the left direction of the front view by the interference (contact) with the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a. I can play a game. That is, since the flow-down direction (repulsion direction) of the ball which has flowed (entered) into the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the direction in which the ball tends to repel also changes depending on the force of the ball, the angle of entering the storage device 700, and the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be devised to strike. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 which plays the game, select the pachinko machine 10 in which the ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 in consideration of the adjustment condition of the nails 709a and 709b. Can. Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the fun of finding the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation in the case where a ball flows (enters) into the storage device 700 in a state where the storage valve 704a is set to the open state will be described. When the ball flows into the storage device 700, the ball first flows down the induction channel 705. Since a nail 709a and a nail 709b are respectively provided on the left and right of the guide channel 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is on the right or left while flowing down the guide channel 705. Even by passing between the nails 709a and 709b, the flow direction of the ball can be corrected to the center. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the induction flow channel 705 flows into the induction flow channel 704 provided on the center side downstream of the induction flow channel 705.

  When the storage valve 704 a is open, the ball can flow down the induction channel 704, so the ball that has flowed into the induction channel 704 flows downstream to the induction channel 704 and the general winning opening (in the middle) Value winning entry) 701 to enter the ball. As a result, a smaller number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out than the number of prize balls for entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, in a state in which the storage valve 704 a is opened, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow-down direction does not change due to repulsion and does not flow into the induction channel 706 or the induction channel 708. That is, instead of being unable to enter the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a large number of prize balls obtained, the ball entering the out ports (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e There is no chance that you will not get a prize ball. Therefore, when the ball is made to enter the storage device 700, the winning ball can be stably obtained, so that the player can feel a sense of security.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. A state (a gambling state in which many winning balls may be obtained but may not be obtained) may be set. Also, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, it is possible to enter the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (although it is a small amount, it is stable It is possible to make it possible to obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Can play a game.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. The release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control unit 113 is partially changed. There is a difference in points. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input / output port 205. The release button 800 is disposed at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) at which the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that pressing is detected is output to the input / output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 to open the storage valve 704 a based on the pressing detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is set to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68A, the first contact type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described. Like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored.

  Note that, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with only each jackpot type. That is, different from the first embodiment, regardless of whether it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the same for the value of the first hit classification counter C2 the same The jackpot type is associated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the jackpot C is defined in association with the range where the value of the first collision type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (FIG. 68 (a See 202b1)). In addition, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot C, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given as added value (transition to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time shortening state of the normal symbol). Moreover, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot C continues until the drawing of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

  On the other hand, the jackpot D is associated with the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the first collision type counter C2 and defined (refer to 202 b 2 in FIG. 68A). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special gaming state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Moreover, after the end of the jackpot D, a definite variation state of the special symbol of the special symbol is given as an added value (transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol). Moreover, the definite variation state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot D continues until the next jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type that has been won. That is, a more general configuration than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is employed. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the defined contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the defined contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment includes the probability change setting flag 203h, the probability change counter 203i, the winning number counter 203j, the operation counter 203k, and the remaining balls provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation effective flag 203o, the probability variation effective timer 203p, and the discharged number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to a special variation of the special symbol after the big hit in the second specified winning device 650. That is, in this embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the gaming state to be set at the end of the jackpot is determined in advance, and whether or not to shift to the special symbol state variation during special gaming state (during jackpot state) Since the determination is not performed, it is not necessary to use the above-described configurations in the present embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the release flag 203s is provided in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. In the release flag 203s, it is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the release button 800 and the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (a state where the ball can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a is released). ?) Is a flag indicating The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the storage valve 704a is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, referring back to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, the number-of-winnings counter 223 j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment is eliminated, and a storage state flag 223 k and an outflow time counter 223 k are added. There is.

  The storage state flag 223 k is a flag indicating whether the storage valve 704 a is set to the open (released) state. If the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed, and a sphere can be stored at the upper part thereof. On the other hand, when the storage state flag 223 k is off, the storage valve 704 a is set to the open (released) state, which indicates that the sphere can flow down the guiding channel 704. Each time the storage state flag 223k is received from the main controller 110, the storage state flag 223k is updated to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The flow-down time counter 223 k is a ball entry port (general winning opening 701, general winning combination) in which the ball having flowed into the induction channel 704, induction channel 706, or induction channel 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a. It is a counter for counting the time until the ball enters the mouth 702, the out-port 703d, or the out-port 703e) (ball-sinking time). By counting the ball swelling period, the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value opening When the ball enters the winning opening) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball entering is normal. Whenever the storage state command is received from main controller 110, the flow-down time counter 233k sets a counter value corresponding to 1 second (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Also, each time the main processing (see FIG. 42) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, one is subtracted.

  In the present embodiment, with the storage valve 704 a closed, a ball enters a general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704 a or the storage valve 704 a is opened. When the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e in the state, a warning image (FIG. b) Reference is configured to be displayed. However, if the ball flows into the induction channel 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball will switch to the closed state and then the ball will enter the general winning opening There is a case to enter the winning opening) 701. Similarly, if the ball flows into the induction channel 706 or the induction channel 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a switches from the closed state to the open state, the balls generally change after the storage valve 704a switches to the open state. There are cases where the player enters a winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and an out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as normal ball entry (do not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, the flow-down time counter 233k is performed for a predetermined period (1 second). Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until one second set as the counter value has elapsed, the ball has a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or When entering the out slot (small value winning opening) 703e, it is determined that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed).

<About control processing of main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 69) are changed from the first embodiment. In the following, only the various processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed descriptions of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As in the first embodiment, in the main processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 69) in the present embodiment, jackpot control processing 2 (see FIG. 70) is substituted for the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) with respect to the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Is different in that Moreover, it is different also in the point by which storage control processing (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is performed after completion | finish of 2nd symbol display update processing (S1007). Further, it is also different in that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control process 2 (S1021) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (big hit state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or 1) A process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (S1021), in each of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is eliminated. In the second embodiment, since the storage valve 704a is set to the open state based on the player operating the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether it is the special game state (big hit state) or not Is switched.

  In the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the start timing of a new round is determined by the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a The release is set (S1121), the number-of-rounds command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123) ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) have won after releasing.

  If it is determined in the process of S1123 that the closing condition for the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is selected. After closing (S1124), the process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state) is finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1109 that it is the start timing of ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set first (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot D (probable variation jackpot) (S1126), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not D (ie, the jackpot C) (S1126: No), 100 is set to the value of the hour / minute counter 203r (S1127), and this processing ends. By setting 100 to the hour and hour counter 203r, it is possible to set the time for the normal symbol to a short period until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1126 that the present jackpot is a jackpot D (probable variation jackpot), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in order to give a probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot ( S1128), this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S1109, when it is not the start timing of the ending (S1109: No), this process is ended. That is, the prize winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of this embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening opened in the jackpot is provided. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine (that is, a more general pachinko machine) in which the state after the big hit is predetermined according to the big hit type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). The storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001). If it is determined that the release flag 203s is on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (storage device 700). Since it means that the state in which the ball can be stored is released), it is next determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the depression detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), the reservoir valve 704a is kept open. This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (ie, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), for the storage device to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is set to off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the closing of the storage valve 704a has been set, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closing state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state demand set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, to the display control device 114, a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the closed state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the character "open gate when the button is pressed!" Is displayed on the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (a state in which balls can be stored in the storage device 700 is set) Then, it is determined whether the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the depression detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (ie, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. In order to save, this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. It sets to (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the storage valve 704a is set, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the open state. For this purpose, a storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear surface image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the character "open in gate" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing the storage control process, it is possible to set the opening or closing of the storage valve 704 a in accordance with the operation status of the release button 800. Thus, by storing the ball in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, any of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which the ball enters the ball and a state in which the ball entering (entering) the storage device 700 flows down toward the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of other processes not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (1811) in the present embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same process as each process of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment is performed. Each is executed.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not a malfunction such as a failure occurs in the storage valve 704a Then, a warning process for giving a warning when a failure occurs is executed (S1921), and this process ends.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), then whether or not the storage state command is received is It is determined (S1922). When it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is also performed by setting a rear surface image (see FIGS. 63 (a) and (b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update. Update the contents.

  When the process of S1923 ends, a counter value corresponding to one second is set to the flow-down time counter 2231 (S1924), and the process ends. The presence or absence of a malfunction can be accurately determined in the storage valve 704a by using the ball-sinking time set for the flow-down time counter 223l. When it is determined in the process of S1922 that the storage state command has not been received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the main control device 110 displays the state of the storage valve 704a on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the release state command or the closing state command. A command for causing the display control unit 114 to be set can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, warning processing (S1921) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the warning process (S1921) is a process for determining the presence or absence of a failure such as a failure in the storage valve 704a and performing a warning when a failure occurs.

  In the warning process (S1921), it is first determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101). If it is on (S4101: Yes), then whether the value of the flow-down time counter 2231 is 0 It is determined whether or not (S4102). Then, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the flashing period has elapsed. Therefore, storage time notification processing for reporting a failure in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4103), and this processing is ended. Also, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the ball is currently in a flush period associated with the storage valve 704a being closed. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Here, the details of the storage notification processing (S4103) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is also set in the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704 a and enters the general winning opening (middle value winning opening) 701. This means that although the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the storage valve 704a is not normally closed, so a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202) , End this process.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a defect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the store clerk in the hall can easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4101 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (ie, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104) If it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) and the flashing period has elapsed. Therefore, the release notification process for notifying a defect in the open state (release state) of the storage valve 704a is executed (S4105), and the present process is ended. The release notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the release notification process (S4105). In this release notification process (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command is out. It is determined whether or not the prize information corresponding to the entrance to the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302), and the entrance to the out mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is accepted. If no winning information is included (S4302: No), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the prize information corresponding to the entry to the out slot (small value winning prize port) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303. When the prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the entry to the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 702 (S4301: Yes), or to the out mouth (small value prize hole) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 executed when the winning information corresponding to the entry of the ball is included (S4302: Yes), an error command for display corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 flows down the induction channel 704, so the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or out The ball enters the mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e because there is a high possibility that the storage valve 704a is not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7B) for notifying that the storage valve 704a has a defect in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), the player or the store clerk in the hall can easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be quickly resolved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing the balls therein. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 704, 706, 708) in its interior, and is configured to allow the balls to flow down to different ball entrances. Further, a storage valve 704 a capable of closing the flow path is provided in the induction flow path 704. When the induction channel 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one sphere can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

  In addition, in a state where the storage valve 704 a is opened, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 flows down the induction channel 704 (compare to the induction channel 706 and the induction channel 708, to the induction channel 704). Since the ball is configured to be more likely to flow in, the ball can be made to enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the induction flow channel 704. Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the winning balls based on the entry of the balls into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701.

  On the other hand, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball is stored in the upper part, the guiding flow path 706, the sphere flowing into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) the stored ball. Or repel in either direction of the induction channel 708. That is, any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a large number of prize balls to be paid out or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703 d or 703 e in which the prize balls are not paid out Enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball hit to a game board. Among these conventional game machines, there are some which can release a held ball to the game board by the operation of the player and enter a predetermined winning opening provided in the direction of movement ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's interest, only by causing the balls released using the holding device to enter the predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67), the storage valve 704a can be set in the open state while the operation is being performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. A state (a gambling state in which many winning balls may be obtained but may not be obtained) may be set. Also, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, it is possible to enter the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (although it is a small amount, it is stable It is possible to make it possible to obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Can play a game. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, switching of the state of the storage valve 704a can be performed at any timing of the player by the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. As a result, it is possible to cause each player to start playing the game in a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable to his / her preference. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704 a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to perform lottery for whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. May be

  Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, depending on the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, if it is easy for the ball to enter the out-port (small value winning opening) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed, A game can be played in expectation of the valve 704a being opened. On the other hand, if the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b makes it easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, the lottery continues to be lost. It is possible to play the game in anticipation that the storage valve 704a continues to be closed. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow paths through which the sphere can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, the induction flow path 706 and the induction flow path 708, but the invention is not limited thereto. More flow paths and a winning opening may be provided. Also, more variations may be given to the number of winning balls paid out when the ball enters each winning opening. Thereby, when the storage valve 704a is closed, it is possible to increase the randomness of the number of winning balls that can be acquired, so the player is more interested in the flow direction of the ball entering the storage device 700. It can be done.

  Moreover, when the storage valve 704a is open, a plurality of flow paths through which the ball can flow may be provided. And when flowing down each flow path, you may provide the ball inlet which a different number of award balls are paid out, respectively. Thereby, even if the storage valve 704a is opened, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be given randomness, so that the flow-down direction of the ball entering the storage device 700 for the player Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 upstream, the sphere can be easily introduced into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specified winning opening 65a is provided as a winning opening opened in the special gaming state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704 a is opened only while the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. As a result, there is no need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704 a open. In addition, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. By configuring in this manner, since it is sufficient to operate the release button 800 only when switching the state, it is possible to reduce the number of operations performed by the player. Also, contrary to the release button 800, operation means may be provided in which the storage valve 704a is closed by operating. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to allow each player to select a game characteristic that matches his or her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed by characters for the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a photographed image in a state where the storage valve 704a is opened or a photographed image in a closed state may be displayed. Further, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display indicating the state of the storage valve 704 a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be displayed in front of the third symbol. Further, the aspect of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the aspect of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 704a may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closing state command is received. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) is displayed which describes the condition under which the storage valve 704a is opened and the merits and demerits when the storage valve 704a is opened. It may be configured as follows. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 so that the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a by left hitting, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, as in the first embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, it is possible to flow the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting the right in the special game state (big hit state), so the winning balls in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Thus, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704 a and the sphere newly introduced to the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with each other, the flow path where the newly introduced sphere flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 being divided into the induction channel 706 and the induction channel 708 is substantially the same. Although it comprised, it is not restricted to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is increased (for example, 1.5 times the diameter of the ball), and the ball stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a takes a position closer to the front or right It may be configured to obtain. When the ball is disposed on the upper side of the storage valve 704 a in the left side in a front view, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the right side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the right in the front view, so the ball is likely to flow down the guiding channel 708. As described above, since the out-ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guiding flow path 708, the player can not obtain the winning balls (which is disadvantageous for the player) . On the other hand, when the ball is disposed on the upper side of the storage valve 704a in the front view to the right, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 is likely to be repelled to the left in front view, so the ball is likely to flow down the guiding channel 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guiding channel 708, the player can obtain a relatively large number of winning balls (which is advantageous for the player) ). In this manner, the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a can create an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player, so that the storage valve 704a is closed when the storage valve 704a is closed. Can be made aware of the arrangement of the balls stored at the top of the Therefore, if the arrangement of the balls is an adverse arrangement (that is, if the balls are stored on the left side in the front view), the storage valve 704a may be opened (released) by pressing (operating) the release button 800. it can. Also, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, the balls are stored to the right in the front view), the player can be made to think that he wants to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. . Therefore, since it is possible to give fun to determine whether or not the release button 800 is pressed according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Modification of First Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the state (open or closed) of the second specified winning opening 650a and the state (open or closed) of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 are mutually independent. And in the bonus game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is controlled to be always in the open state, while the second specified winning opening 650a is for a predetermined period in 12 rounds (FIG. 16). It is configured to be set to the open state only in the open period defined for each jackpot type shown in FIG. Further, two types of flow paths (induction flow path 652 and induction flow path 653) are provided in the second variable winning device 650, and induction is performed only when the ball flows down the induction flow path 652 The ball is configured to be able to enter into a ball socket 654 provided downstream of the flow path 652. That is, even if the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a during the big hit, it is configured so that it does not shift to the special symbol of the definite variation state after the big hit if the ball does not flow down the induction channel 652 The

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the second specified winning opening 650a is stored by using the slide member 900 in place of the member for opening and closing the second specified winning opening 650a of the first embodiment and the storage valve 607a. The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, the opening / closing operation of the second specified winning opening 650a and the opening / closing control of the guide channel 607 in the storage device 600 can be performed by one member, and the states are switched in conjunction with each other. That is, when the second specified winning opening 650a is opened, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened, and when the second specified winning opening 650a is closed, the guiding channel 607 (general winning opening 602). ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this manner, the second specified winning hole 650a, the general winning hole 602 (ie, the winning opening opened in the jackpot by the slide member 900), both winning jack for winning balls in the jackpot It can be treated as

  In addition, only the guide channel 652 continuing to the probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the channel switching valve 650d, the guide channel 653, and the normal ball inlet 655. Is abolished. That is, if it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a, it is configured to shift to the special symbol state of probability variation after the end of the jackpot. In addition, it is configured to change the winning opening to be opened in the 12th round according to the jackpot type. That is, the jackpot (V route opening jackpot) in which the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to the open state in the 12th round, and the first specification in all rounds of the jackpot A jackpot (V route closed jackpot) in which the winning opening 65a is set to an open state (the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) is provided It is done.

  Along with the change from the first embodiment, the termination condition of each round of the jackpot is also changed. Specifically, in 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds of the jackpot, the ball entered the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 Is changed to 10 in total or 30 seconds after the start of the round, the round game is over (the first specified winning opening 65a is closed). In addition, in the 12th round, the number of balls entering the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 will be 10 in total, or Is changed so that the round game is ended (the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed) when 30 seconds have passed since the start of.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that it is a member for switching the state of the second specified winning opening 650a (the closing portion 910) The point that the member (ball storage part 920) for switching the state of the guiding channel 607 is constituted by one member (slide member 900), and the ball is thrown out when the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. The number of winning balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the contents of the ROM 202 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 Is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine in the first embodiment is a partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 0 is a point that has been changed from. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of V route opening big hit (big hit F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when it comes to 12 rounds of V route open jackpot (big hit F), the characters “ROUND12” are displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. In addition, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specified winning opening 650a has been opened is formed at the upper center of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. In the display area 717, the characters "CHANCE !!" and the characters "during a definite change route opening !!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game is to shift to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the jackpot by causing the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a. The other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents (see FIG. 6A) displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the downstream structure of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. Further, a member (closing portion 910) for opening or closing the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a member (ball storage portion 920) for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 Are arranged in a straight line. Although the details will be described later, this is because the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both parts of the slide member.

  Further, at the inlet of the storage device 600, a nail 921a and a nail 921b are provided. A store clerk in the hall can adjust, for example, the rate of inflow of balls into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before opening the hall. By changing the proportion of balls flowing into the storage device 600, the number of balls entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 can be varied in the 12th round of the big hit it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball shot by the right hitting is more likely to flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls that can be won by the player at the big hit. Therefore, since the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, the interest for the player's game can be improved.

  Conversely, when it is made difficult for the balls to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specified winning hole 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600, and the second The ball reaching the specific winning hole 650a can be increased. Thus, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. In addition, since it becomes easy to enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round, when it becomes a big hit F, it can be made easy to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, since the possibility that jackpots will continue in a short period is high, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the structure for adjusting the ease of ball | bowl inflow to the storage apparatus 600 (easiness to enter the ball to the 2nd specific winning opening 650a) is not restricted to a nail. For example, a wind turbine may be provided at the inlet of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be able to slide and displace to the back side or the front side in a front view with respect to the game board 13, and the second specification is made by sliding to a front side in the front view. The winning opening 650a and the induction channel 607 can be closed respectively. On the other hand, by slidingly displacing the slide member 900 with respect to the game board 13 to the back side in a front view, the second specified winning opening 650a and the guiding flow path 607 can be opened.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a view from above of the game board 13 when the second specified winning opening 650a and the induction channel 607 are closed by the slide member 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78 (b) is a view from above of the game board 13 when the second specified winning opening 650a and the guiding channel 607 are opened respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular closure portion 910 and a spherical storage portion 920 project from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930 (approximately “ It has a "U-shaped" shape. The closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 are projected to the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 through the openings 940 a and 940 b respectively opened in the base plate 60. can do.

  In a state in which the slide member 900 is slidingly displaced to the front side of the front view, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the upper portion of the second specified winning opening 650a is closed by the closing portion 910, so the ball is second variable It will not be possible to enter the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guiding channel 607 is closed by the ball reservoir 920, the ball can be made to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the slide member 900 is slidingly displaced to the back side of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the guiding channel 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball right, the ball to the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 602 provided downstream of the guiding channel 607, or the second specified winning hole 650a provided downstream of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in the present modification, switching of the state of the second specified winning opening 650a and switching of the state of the guiding flow passage 607 can be realized by only the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specified winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game, such as lottery of special symbols, determination of fluctuation time, etc., if processing speed is reduced due to increase of processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by the introduction of the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described. As described above, in the present modification, when the ball enters the second specified winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the definite variation ball inlet 654. Then, as a jackpot type, a jackpot in which the second specified winning opening 650 is opened in the 12th round and a jackpot in which the first specified winning opening 65a is opened in the 12th round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, big hit E (V route closed big hit) is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specified winning opening 65a continues for a predetermined time (30 seconds), or the ball is It is a jackpot that is open until 10 balls enter the ball. That is, since the ball can not be inserted into the ball entry ball 654 disposed inside the second variable winning device 650 in the special gaming state (big hit state), the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit ends. It is granted once.

  On the other hand, the big hit F (V route open big hit) is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). The jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special gaming state of 15 rounds is given, and a second specified winning opening 650a and a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are given a predetermined time (30 seconds) in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. The ball is released until the ball enters 10 balls), and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specified winning opening 650a continues for a predetermined time (30 seconds) or the ball enters 10 balls. It is a jackpot that is open until the ball. In jackpot F, the second specified winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so if it is possible to enter the ball into the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round, a definite variation of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Is granted. On the other hand, as a result of the ball entering only the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 despite the fact that the player did not hit the right in the 12th round or did the right hitting, the ball was moved to the second specified winning opening 650a. When 12 rounds are finished without entering the ball, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the big hit F.

<About Control Process of Main Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In the present embodiment, the contents of the main processing (see FIG. 34) are changed from the first embodiment. Specifically, instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment, a big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed. ing. In the following, only the description of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be given, and the detailed description of the other processes which are not changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031). The jackpot control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specified winning opening 65a or the second specified winning opening 650a for each round of the jackpot state.

  S1101, S1102, S1104 executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment in the respective processes of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 of the jackpot control process 3. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, the same processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), each process of S1103, S1107, and S1108, which has been executed in the jackpot control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, is eliminated.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1105 (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36) Instead of this, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is ended. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121). The jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the states (opened state or closed state) of the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121), the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. Processing is performed.
Also, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in the present modification, if it is determined to be the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), then the current jackpot type is the jackpot F (V route open It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1211).

  If it is determined that the jackpot F is not the jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that it is the jackpot E in which the first specified winning opening (first jackpot opening) 65a is opened in all rounds of jackpot. The opening of the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot F in the process of S1211 (S1211: Yes), it is a jackpot type that the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a opens only in the 12th round, the second specification The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing portion 910 closing the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage portion 920 closing the guiding channel 607 of the lottery apparatus 600. (The part of the slide member 900), and the closing part 910 and the ball storage part 920 slide in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specified winning opening (the second large opening) 650a by the process of S1203, the guiding channel 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 by the process of S1203, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a And a storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) to notify the voice lamp control device 114 that the induction channel 607 is set to the open state (release state) (S1212) , And moves the process to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE !!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to easily recognize that it is a chance for the player to shift to the special symbol oddity state.

  The transition to the special symbol oddity state is likely to become a big hit again in a short period after the big hit ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can more seriously aim at the second specified winning opening 650a to hit the ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the jackpot from becoming a mere operation for obtaining the prize ball, and enjoy the game in the special gaming state (during the jackpot state).

  As described above, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning hole (second large opening) 650a among the balls hit to the right is the nails 921a, 921b (provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600) It can be made variable by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in the front view, or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in the front view (open the nail), the right-handed ball flows more into the storage device 600. It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, as the nails 921a and 921b are opened, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Also, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 without entering the ball into the second specified winning opening 650, the 12 rounds will end . Therefore, it becomes difficult to shift to the special symbol's definite variation state. In addition, when the ball easily flows into the storage device 600, the ball easily enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 having a larger number of winning balls paid out compared to the second specified winning opening 650a. (Refer FIG.9 (b)). As a result, the player can obtain a large number of winning balls, and the interest for the player's jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, in the 1st to 11th rounds, the player aims at the first specified winning opening 65a and strikes the right, so the player is disposed downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13 The ball also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, by the start of the twelfth round, one ball is stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920. Therefore, 12 rounds are started, and when slide member 900 is slide-displaced and the upper part of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is opened, the ball stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 is the general winning opening (Large value winning opening) flows down to 602. As a result, of the balls hit substantially in the 12th round, the balls are directed to the second specified winning hole 650a by the time the nine balls enter the general winning hole (large value winning hole) 602. If it is not possible to enter the ball, the 12th round will end.

  On the other hand, by adjusting the nail 921 a and the nail 921 b to approach each other (closing the nail), the ball hit by the right becomes difficult to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, since the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650 becomes relatively high, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second specified winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the special symbol oddity state after the big hit end. As a result, since it becomes easy to become a big hit again in a short period after the end of the big hit F, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this way, by changing the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed, the second ball entry port 650a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is obtained. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability of the jackpot F when the store clerk in the hall adjusts the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to enter the special winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game characteristic which is easy to shift to the special symbol state. It is easy to obtain many prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch to the game characteristic which is hard to shift to the special symbol oddity state. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the sales policy of the hall.

  Referring back to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S1109: No), the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. Instead of), winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. The details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing a winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the present modification. Of the winning processing 2 (S1122), the processing of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are respectively identical to the processing of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning processing (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment Processing is performed.

  Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in this modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specification When it is determined that the total number of balls entered to the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any winning opening (first specified winning opening (first large opening)) 65a which has been opened, or the second specification A winning opening closing process for setting the closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning hole closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing processing (S1431) is processing for setting the closing of the winning opening when the closing condition of the winning opening is established in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the 12th round (S4401). And if it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the winning opening currently open is the first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a, so the first specified winning opening (first (1 large open port) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the present is the 12th round (S4401), the winning opening opened according to the jackpot type is a different round, so the present jackpot is the jackpot F (V route It is determined whether or not the open jackpot) (S4403). When it is determined that the jackpot F (V route opening jackpot) is not (that is, it is jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) (S4403: No), the currently open winning opening is the first specified winning opening ( Since it means that it is the first large opening port) 650a, the processing is shifted to S4402 to set the closing of the first specified winning opening (first large opening port) 65a (S4402), and this processing finish.

  In the process of S4403, when it is determined that the present jackpot is the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (S4403: Yes), the second specified winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. This means that the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently being opened. Therefore, in this case, the closing of the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is set (S4404), and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed, the storage state command corresponding to the closing state (storage state) is set ( S4405), this processing ends.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the storage state command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display back image change command is received by the display control device 114, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the chance to shift to the special symbol indeterminate state has ended.

  By executing this winning opening closing process (S1431), it is possible to accurately close the winning opening that has been opened.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the process contents of the command determination process are partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from main controller 110 at the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process The processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the command determination process in the present modification, instead of the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment, an error notification process 2 (S1971) is executed. The error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the above-described error notification process 2 (S1971). Of the error notification processing 2 (S1971), in the processing of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same processing as the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in this modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45) Instead of the reference), the hit notification process 2 is executed (S1981), and this process is ended. As in the case of the hit notification process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) is a process for giving a notification when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit. It is.

  Next, the above-described hit notification processing 2 (S1981) will be described with reference to FIG. In hit notification processing 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). If it is determined in the process of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0 If not (S1992), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1992 that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball discharge period has elapsed. Next, it is determined whether or not the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning entry (large value winning entry) 602 is included in the prize information command (S1993).

  If it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning entry (large value winning entry) 602 is not included (S1993: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set in the closed state (storage state) Despite this, it means that the ball has flowed downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the failure of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1991 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (is off) (S1991: No), it is then determined whether the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is 0 (S1995) ). Then, if it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then, the general winning prize entry (small value winning prize entry) 601 is entered in the received prize information command. It is determined whether or not winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the process of S1996, when the winning information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (canceled state) It means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 despite the fact that the ball and the brushing period have passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify of the failure of the storage valve 607a.

  By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be reported promptly, so that the malfunction can be resolved quickly.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open and close the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the guiding channel in the storage device 600. The opening and closing operation of 607 can be performed simultaneously. That is, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a winning ball during a big hit.

  Since switching of the state of the second specified winning hole 650a and switching of the state of the guiding channel 607 can be realized only by sliding the slide member 900, as in the first embodiment, the second specification The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game, such as lottery of special symbols, determination of fluctuation time, etc., if processing speed is reduced due to increase of processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in the present modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by the introduction of the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  Further, in the present modification, only the positive insertion ball opening 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 always enters the positive insertion ball opening 654. It is configured to be a ball. Thereby, if the ball can be made to enter the second specified winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple game characteristic of transitioning to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the jackpot. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to easily determine whether or not to shift to a definite variation state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to provide a fun to enjoy even for beginners. In addition, since the flow path switching valve 650 d provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment, the induction flow path 653, and the normal ball entry port 655 are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650 is Structure can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this modification, the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 among the right-handed balls is adjusted by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is lottery whether or not to win based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and whether or not to shift to probability fluctuation state separately during the win There is something to draw. In this way, it is suppressed that the hit is a mere work to get a lot of balls, and it is possible to play the hit game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest for the player's game I am trying to

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area in which the game ball can be entered only during a hit, and the probability fluctuation state after hit by having the game ball enter the predetermined area. There is one that shifts to (for example, JP-A-2003-180999).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, the percentage of game balls entering a predetermined area during a hit is set in advance for each model, so to vary the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, the hall The side had to introduce a different model. That is, in the conventional game machine, there is no freedom in the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, and it is difficult to flexibly respond to different business policies for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been desired.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease of entering the ball into the storage device 600 when right-handed can be easily changed according to the adjustment of the nails 921a, 921b It is composed of This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the second ball entrance 650 a provided downstream of the inlet portion of the storage device 600. Therefore, it is possible to change the playability of the jackpot F when the store clerk in the hall adjusts the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and it is easy to enter the special winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with game characteristics that are easy to shift to the special symbol state. It is possible to switch to game characteristics that are difficult to shift to a definite variation state of a symbol. Therefore, since the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the sales policy of the hall, the versatility can be improved.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be arbitrarily determined. For example, by setting the open time to 10 seconds, it is possible to more easily enter the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a. As a result, it is easy to shift to a definite variation state of the special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Also, the open time may be set to, for example, 2 seconds. The pachinko machine 10 has various ways of hitting to make the ball enter the second specified winning hole 650a in a limited time by shortening the opening time, and the pachinko machine 10 with the nails 921a and 921b more closed. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to heat the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In this modification, the inlet of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specified winning hole 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be varied by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for changing the proportion of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, a winning opening may be provided which simply pays out the prize ball by entering the out port or a ball. Then, the second specified winning opening 650a may be configured such that the open / close state is switched by a single member. Even if configured in this way, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specified winning opening 650a can be changed by changing the ease of entering the out-port or the winning opening. It can be done. Further, the structure can be simplified by replacing the storage device 600 with an out port or a winning port, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the ease of entering the storage device 600 does not have to be adjustable. That is, in place of the nails 921a and 921b, a cylindrical member fixed to the board may be provided. This makes it impossible to adjust on the hole side whether or not the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so the ball enters the second specified winning hole 650a. Even if you don't ball, you can prevent the tip of the discouragement from going to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from distrusting the hall.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. In this way, it can be determined early whether or not to shift to the special symbol's probability change state, so it is possible to play the game with ease in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). In addition, the second specified winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, since it is not determined until the final round, 15 rounds, whether or not the transition to the special variation state of the special symbol is made, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the special variation state of the special symbol longer. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot game of the player. Further, for example, when the jackpot becomes F, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened at the 12th round and the 13th round. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (large value winning hole) 602 in the 12th round, and the ball storage portion in the 13th round There can be no sphere at the top of 920. Therefore, the chance of entering the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a can be increased.

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but this is not a limitation, and a plurality of spheres can be stored, For example, four balls may be stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920. In this case, 12 rounds are ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602 after changing the ending condition of the 12 rounds. It may be configured to In the 1 to 11 rounds of the jackpot, a game is performed in an attempt to bring the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a by hitting the right, so in many cases the ball is in the upper part of the reservoir 920 before the start of the 12 rounds. The upper limit number (4) is stored. That is, 12 rounds are started, and four stored balls flow simultaneously into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by opening the ball storage portion 920, so immediately after the start of the 12 rounds 4 balls enter the specified winning opening (the first specified winning opening 65a, the second specified winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602). Therefore, 12 rounds are finished by one more ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (a total of five balls are the second specified winning opening) Since the player enters the state of entering the general winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, the opportunity to enter the second specified winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more tense and play 12 rounds of games. In addition, in the 1 to 11 rounds of the jackpot, while wishing that the ball does not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the upper limit number of balls stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920 is four) 12 It is possible to play a jackpot game while wishing to reach a round. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game while making the player feel tense even during the jackpot, it is prevented (suppressed) that the jackpot is just like the work for obtaining the prize ball, and the player's jackpot game Can improve the interest for

  It should be noted that the number of balls entering the specific winning combination that is the end condition of the 12 rounds and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the ending condition of the 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper portion of the ball storage portion 920. This makes it possible to play the game by strongly wishing that the ball is not stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round. Also, conversely, the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the ball storage portion 920 may be reduced. Thereby, even if the upper limit number of balls are stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 by the start of 12 rounds, giving the opportunity to enter the balls into the second specified winning opening 650a in 12 rounds multiple times Can. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the special variation of the special symbol, so it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In this modification, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage portion 920 is opened, but the jackpot during the jackpot is limited to this is not. For example, you may be comprised so that it may be alert | reported whether it is big hit E or big hit F according to the result of the presentation performed by the 11th round of big hit. More specifically, for example, in each round of 1 round to 11 rounds, an effect may be performed in which a friend of justice and a monster fight. Then, if the allies of justice win by 11 rounds, it may be notified that the jackpot is F, and if the allies of justice are defeated, the jackpot E may be notified. That is, since the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round when the allies of justice win, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the special variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the result of the presentation performed in the jackpot.

  It should be noted that there is a high probability that the allegations of justice have a high degree of expectation (the case of jackpot F is high) and the allies of justice are defeated (case of jackpot E). And may be provided. For example, justice allies attack enemies with their own special techniques, or they are configured to have a high expectation of winning if justice allies avoid enemy attacks, so that justice allies off attacks. It may be configured to be more likely to be defeated if the enemy attacks with a special move. This makes it possible to predict the outcome not only as a result of whether or not the justice allies wins, but also in the flow of presentation leading to victory or defeat. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest for the player's jackpot game.

  In addition, the contents of the rendition performed by the 11th round are not limited to the rendition where the allies of justice and the monster fight as described above, and can suggest the advantageous jackpot F and the jackpot E which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot F It is sufficient if it is an aspect. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if it is possible to find the treasure by the 11th round, it may be configured to be notified that the jackpot is F, or the boy character 710 It may be configured to display an effect of eating gluttony and to be notified that it is a jackpot F if all the provided food is consumed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a unique configuration not installed in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 600 is provided. It may be More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, a condition under which the storage valve 607a is opened, a merit when it is opened, and a disadvantage when the ball is hit in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) which demonstrates may be displayed. Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the second specified winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are both treated as winning openings for obtaining a winning ball for the big hit, but the general winning opening (high value The winning opening) 602 may be treated as a normal winning opening. In other words, each round of the big hit ends when 10 balls or more enter the first specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 650a as an end condition of each round of the big hit (generally at the end of the round) The number of balls entering the winning opening 602 may not be involved. As a result, as the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot, it becomes more profitable for the player, so it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  In this modification, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second specified winning hole 650a, and the storage device 600 can be formed. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so as to make it difficult for the ball to flow in, the ball is easily entered into the second specified winning hole 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a, 921b, it was configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special symbol of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, but change the ratio of transition to the special symbol of the definite pattern The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of making the ratio of balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, the second variable prize device 650 is provided with a probability change ball inlet 654 and a normal ball inlet 655 as in the first embodiment. It is good also as composition. The store clerk in the hall may adjust the ratio in which the balls having flowed into the inside of the second variable winning device 650 can be distributed to the probability change ball inlet 654 and the normal ball inlet 655. More specifically, for example, after being replaced with the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment as the second variable winning device 650 in this modification, the flow path switching valve 650d is switched to Abolish the axis 650e. Then, for example, a nail may be hit at a branch position between the induction flow channel 652 and the induction flow channel 653 (that is, above the place where the switching shaft 650 e is provided in the first embodiment). The position where the nail is to be hit may be, for example, a distance about the radius of the ball from the place where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15). That is, it may be a position where the balls flowing down the induction channel 651 can come in contact (collision), and the position where the sphere can flow down to the induction channel 652 and the induction channel 653. By configuring in this way, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the gaming ball flowing down the guiding channel 651 can easily contact (collide) with the left side surface of the nail Therefore, the ball is likely to be repelled in the left direction of the front view. Therefore, the balls are more likely to flow into the guide channel 652 provided on the left side of the front view in the downstream of the second variable winning device 650, so that the balls can be easily entered into the probability change ball inlet 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make the special symbol in a definite variation state after the end of the jackpot. Conversely, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the gaming ball having flowed down the guiding channel 651 is likely to contact (collide) with the right side surface of the nail, so the ball is frontal. It is likely to be repelled in the right direction. Therefore, the ball easily flows into the guide channel 653 provided on the left side of the front view on the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650, so the ball can easily enter the ball ball 654 with certainty. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be in the definite variation state after the end of the big hit. As described above, by making it possible to adjust the ease of entering the ball ball 654, the spec of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, the game characteristic corresponding to the sales policy of each hall can be provided.

  Also, as another specific example configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special symbol state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a, 921b in this modification, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is in the open state There may be provided a variable member that switches between the closed state and the closed state. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle consisting of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set in the open state and the period set in the closed state The ratio may be configured to allow the holes to be adjusted. More specifically, for example, operation means capable of setting in a plurality of states such as dip switches is provided. Then, for example, when the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be set in the closed state. That is, since the entrance is always open, the gaming ball is set to be most likely to flow into the storage device 600. Then, if the switch state indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set in the closed state. That is, there is no ball flowing into the storage device 600 at the jackpot, and the state is set such that it is most likely to flow into the second specified winning opening 650a. When the dip switch is in the other state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which it is closed may be extended as it goes from (00000000B) to (11111111B). That is, the ball may easily enter the second specified winning opening 650a as it travels to (11111111B), and may be configured to be more likely to set the definite variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. When configured in this way, a hall that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a gaming machine that is unlikely to become a special symbol indeterminate state, for example, the variable member has a closed state of 0.5 seconds and 2.5 seconds The setting of the dip switch may be adjusted to repeat the open state. Conversely, a hall that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game characteristic gaming machine that is likely to become a special symbol indeterminate state, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state of 2.5 seconds and an open state of 0.5 seconds Adjust the dip switch settings to. Thus, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied in accordance with the sales policy of the hall, so that highly versatile game characteristics corresponding to the sales policy of each hall can be provided.

Modification of Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to close the guiding flow path 704 provided inside the storage device 700 by the storage valve 704a, and one sphere can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. And, in a state where the balls are stored, it is easy for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 with many winning balls to be paid out, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. In the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball is configured to easily enter the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 having a small number of winning balls to be paid out. The storage valve 704 a is basically set in the closed state, and is configured to be in the open state when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the ball may enter any of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e There is a possibility that many balls can be obtained, but it becomes a gambling state where a winning ball may not be obtained), and if the storage valve 704a is in the open state, the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are The player can enter the mouth (medium-value winning opening) 701 (a small amount but can stably obtain a winning ball). Therefore, since the player can switch the playability of the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, each player selects a playability that suits his own taste. Was configured to be able to play a game.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball entry port where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball (it becomes easy to enter the general winning opening 702 or enters the out port depending on the arrangement of the stored balls). Is it easy to change the ball? That is, in a state where the storage valve 704a is closed, it is easily recognized whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls. It is configured to be able to.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration only in that the internal structure of the storage device 700 is different. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the second embodiment. It is identical to the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, a storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in the present modification, up to two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. The details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in the present modification, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the lower right direction in a front view. For this reason, when the storage valve 704a is closed, most of the spheres that first flowed into the induction channel 704 are stopped at the right side of the induction channel 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the guide channel 704 is longer than that in the second embodiment. Also, the induction channel 704 does not have a width sufficient to align two balls in a row. For this reason, when one sphere is stored rightward in the guide channel 704 and another sphere flows into the guide channel 704, in many cases, it is newly added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. Spheres are stored (new spheres are stored between the previously stored spheres and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide channel 704).

  In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the state in which the first stored sphere is to the right and the second stored sphere is stored to the left), the spheres flowing into the storage device 700 thereafter are It is easy to collide with the right side of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the ball flowing into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to an impact due to a collision (contact) with the stored ball. That is, the ball flows into the guiding channel 708, and enters the out port (small value winning hole) 703d, 703e.

  As described above, in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the ball can be made to flow into the storage device 700, the ball enters the out ports (small value winning hole) 703d and 703e. The player can not obtain a winning ball because it will ball. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous to the player.

  A ball entry sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guiding channel 704, for detecting a ball when a ball is present on the front side of the front view. The ball placement sensor 704b can determine the arrangement of the balls. More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entry sensor 704b for a predetermined period (for example, one minute), it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. An image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800 when it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. ) Can be displayed. Thus, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 can easily enter the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e continues for a long time, which is disadvantageous for the player. It is possible to suppress the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example in the case where two balls are stored will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the gaming balls that first flowed into the guiding channel 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stored to the left with respect to the guiding channel 704, and the second guiding channel is the second. The sphere that has flowed into 704 is stored rightward with respect to the induction channel 704. In the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is easy for the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 thereafter to collide (contact) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the flow-down direction of the ball collided (contacted) with the stored ball is likely to change to the left, so it flows down the induction channel 706 and the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (six payouts) It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702.

  As described above, when the storage state is as shown in FIG. 88, the ball can easily enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 by flowing the ball into the storage device 700. This is an advantageous condition for a player who can expect to obtain a winning ball every time a ball flows in.

  Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is difficult to realize as compared to the storage state shown in FIG. For example, when the storage valve 704 a is closed, two spheres flow into the induction channel 704 almost simultaneously, or the sphere that first reaches the storage valve 704 a becomes the reservoir valve 704 a or the induction channel 704. This may be realized, for example, when the second sphere flows into the guiding channel 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repelling in the upper left direction.

  Many of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but even in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. . That is, the balls can be stored in the storage device 700 in anticipation of resetting the storage state and achieving the storage state shown in FIG. 88 again. Therefore, since the player can play the game with the goal of setting the storage state shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, the player can be given a sense of achievement, and the ball is kept entering the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 for an award. You can feel the expectation for being able to get many balls.

  Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement deviates from the ball entering sensor 704b (the arrangement is such that the ball does not shield the front side of the ball entering sensor 704b). It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of an image (see FIG. 89) prompting the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, it is possible to continue the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (suggestion display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. The suggestion display image is an image shown in FIG. 87 when it is determined that the arrangement disadvantageous to the player is continuous for a predetermined time (one minute). More specifically, when the ball is continuously detected for one minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable, and a suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, characters of “under adverse arrangement” are displayed for the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 with respect to the player is an arrangement that is disadvantageous for the player (the arrangement in which the balls having flowed into the storage device 700 are guided to the out ports 703d and 703e). It can be made to recognize. In addition, below the character "due to disadvantageous arrangement", the character "press the button to reset the arrangement !!" is displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated if the release button 800 is pressed (operated).

  As described above, in this modification, the player is notified of the disadvantageous arrangement to the player by the suggestion display image, and the elimination of the disadvantageous arrangement is promoted by the depression (operation) of the release button 800, and the advantageous arrangement (FIG. It is possible to play a game with the aim of becoming an arrangement where balls are guided to the general winning opening 702, as shown. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively participate in the game.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (one minute) elapses in a state disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Alternatively, the storage valve 704a may be switched to the open state (release state). That is, when the ball is detected continuously for a fixed period of time (for example, one minute) by the ball entry sensor 704b, it is determined that the ball is stable in a disadvantageous state, and the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is reset. In order to do so, the storage valve 704a may be opened. As a result, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can suppress playing a game for a long time without noticing the disadvantageous state.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is opened when the ball is continuously detected for 1 minute by the ball entry sensor 704b, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time until) is not limited to this, and may be determined arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state can be shortened. Also, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), the frequency with which the suggestion display image is displayed can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. The electrical configuration in the modification of the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the second embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 A difference is that ball entry sensor 228 is electrically connected to input / output port 225. The other electrical configurations are the same as the electrical configurations in the second embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, at least a disadvantageous time counter 223 m and a suggestion display flag 223 n are added to the RAM 223 in the modification of the second embodiment.

  The disadvantageous time counter 223m is a counter used to determine an elapsed time after the player is in a disadvantageous arrangement (a state in which the balls are guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. The value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is incremented by one each time a ball is detected by the ball entry sensor 228 (see S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, in the state where the counter value is added (state of a value larger than 0), when the ball is not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player (in a state where the ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e) based on the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m, Control is performed to display the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89).

  The suggestion display flag 223 n is a flag indicating whether or not a suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this indication display flag 223 n is on, it indicates that the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed, and if it is off, the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. It shows. The suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (release state) is received, the storage valve 704a is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described.

  In the processes of S1801 to S1817 in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, the same processes as the processes of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in the present modification, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is ended, next, the release suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. S1821), the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the release indication display process (S1821). In this release suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry sensor 228 is on (S4501), and if it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether there is any (S4502). Then, if the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the indication display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and there is no need to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated by adding 1 (S4503), and the disadvantageous time after the renewal It is determined whether the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, since the disadvantageous time counter 223m is updated one by one (every 1 ms) at each main processing (see FIG. 91), the counter value 60000 corresponds to one minute.

  If it is determined in the process of S4503 that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), it is suggested to inform the player that a long time (one minute) has elapsed since the disadvantageous arrangement. A display back image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the ball entry sensor 228 does not detect a ball (the ball entry sensor is off) (S4501: No), it is not a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) First, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). When it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is larger than 0 as a result of the determination in the process of S4507 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantageous time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantageous time counter 223m has been initialized, and there is no need to initialize again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. To complete this process.

  By executing the release suggestion display process (S1821), the player can play the game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains in the arrangement disadvantageous to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. Of the command determination processing, in the processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as the processing of each of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. . In addition, in the command determination process in the present modification, when it is determined that the storage state command has been received from main controller 110 in the process of S1921 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. The storage state command process of (1) is executed (S1929), and the process ends.

  The details of the storage state command process (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command process (S1929). In the storage state command process (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not it is notified by the storage state command that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). When it is determined that the switch to the closed state (storage state) is notified (S4601: Yes), an image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63A) is then displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display rear image change command for displaying on the other hand is set (S 4602), and the storage state flag 223 k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704 a is in the closed state (S 4603). And transition.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the storage status command has not notified that it is not the closed status (storage status) (it has been notified that the open status (release status) has been switched) (S4601: No) Then, a display rear image change command for displaying an image (see FIG. 63 (b)) corresponding to the open state (canceled state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve In order to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (released state), the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S4606). Then, in order to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  In the processing of S4604 executed after the processing of S4603 or S4607, the flow-down time counter 2231 is checked to determine whether or not it is a bulbing period until the ball comes off after the storage valve 704a is switched. A counter value corresponding to one second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing the storage state command process (S1931), it is possible to appropriately update the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment is configured to be able to store two balls inside the storage device 700. Further, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken as storage states when the spheres are stored inside. These storage states are different from each other in the ball entrances in which the balls having flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to enter. Further, since the player can visually recognize the inside of the storage device 700, the storage state can be easily judged by visual observation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not the storage state should be reset by temporarily setting the storage valve 704a in the open state.

  In addition, the advantageous storage state (the storage state in which the ball is likely to enter the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and the disadvantageous storage state (the storage state in which the ball is likely to enter the out port shown in FIG. 87) Can be played in anticipation of an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Then, even in the case of the disadvantageous storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a to regain the advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment by becoming an advantageous storage state, and keep winning the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 and earning many winning balls I can have a sense of expectation for what I can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, although it was constituted so that two spheres could be stored inside storage device 700, it is not restricted to this and it is good also as an internal structure which can store three or more spheres. . In this case, if the ball entry sensor 228 is provided on the left side near the upper end of the guiding flow channel 704, it can be easily determined whether or not it has a disadvantageous arrangement in which it is guided to the out port.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, by providing the ball entry sensor 228 near the upper end of the guiding channel 704, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 disadvantageous for the player? Although it was configured to be able to determine whether or not it is not, the attachment position of the ball entry sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be disposed near the upper end of the guiding channel 704 to the right. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 are in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entry sensor 228, but in the case shown in FIG. The ball entry sensor 228 may be arranged such that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the ball entry sensor 228. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the arrangement is such that the ball can easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entering sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entering sensor 228 continuously for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that it is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. . Therefore, on the basis of the fact that the balls stored in the advantageous arrangement for the player shown in FIG. 88 are in an advantageous arrangement, it is informed that the present state is advantageous for the player. Can. As a method of notification, for example, the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the character "during advantageous arrangement" and the character "right-handed big chance!" You may This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the current state is in an advantageous state, so the release button 800 is mistakenly pressed (operated) to cause the ball stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. (Resetting the advantageous arrangement) can be suppressed.

  Further, the number of ball entry sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entry sensor 228 may be provided near the upper end of the induction flow channel 704 to the right and to the left, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continues to detect the sphere continuously, for example, for 5 seconds, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is stable. In addition, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect the sphere continuously for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 is stable. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement of FIG. 87 (arrangement disadvantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the out ports 703d and 703e), the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to play the game. Can prompt the person to reset the disadvantageous arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player whose ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image (for example, “advantageously” By displaying the character “during placement” and the character “right-handed big chance!” On the small area Ds 2), it is recognized that the present state is advantageous, and You can improve your motivation.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be inclined downward in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. As a result, a storage state advantageous for the player (see FIG. 88) can be easily realized, so that the player can more positively aim at the storage device 700 to shoot a ball. Further, the inclination of the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize the advantageous storage condition or the adverse storage condition.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but another trigger may be provided. For example, the storage state may be reset on a regular basis, such as the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state during a jackpot. If the player is completely given the opportunity to reset the storage state, once it is in the favorable storage state (see FIG. 88), the game is continued with the storage state maintained, and the player can not enter the hall. It may be a profit. On the other hand, if the storage state is periodically reset, it is possible to prevent (prevent) long lasting of the advantageous storage state, thereby preventing disadvantages for the holes.

  In this modification, switching of the state of the storage valve 704a is performed based on pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of days of installation, and the like. As a result, it is possible to cause each player to start playing the game in a period in which the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable to his / her preference.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery performed periodically or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704 a is basically configured to be in the closed state (storage state), and configured to perform lottery for whether to switch to the open state (release state) at a frequency of once per minute. May be Further, when the lottery is won, for example, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds. As a result, if the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the out ports (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e, a lottery is won. Thus, it is possible to play a game in hope that the storage valve 704a is opened. On the other hand, in the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning hole (high value winning hole) 702, the storage valve 704a is opened. It is possible to play a game in hope that the lottery will continue to fall out so as not to Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel game characteristics can be provided. Furthermore, the store clerk or the like of the hall may be configured to adjust the lottery probability of the lottery as to whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (canceled state). As a result, when a player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict and select a table which is set to have a good lottery probability. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of a habit or the like when setting the lottery probability of the hole, it is possible to improve the interest of the player at the stage of selecting a stand before starting the game. .

  In this modification, since the storage device 700 having a unique configuration not provided in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) is displayed that explains the condition under which the storage valve 704a is opened, the merits and disadvantages when the valve is opened. It may be configured to Thereby, the player can easily understand the game characteristics. In addition, the back surface type in which the explanatory image is displayed may be configured to be able to switch the back surface type by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is used to the game with the pachinko machine 10 and has sufficiently understood the game characteristics can change to a back surface type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present modification, the storage valve 704 a is opened only while the release button 800 is pressed (operated), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when depression (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be received during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is open. As a result, there is no need to keep pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704 a open. In addition, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (release state) may be switched. By configuring in this manner, since it is sufficient to operate the release button 800 only when switching the state, it is possible to reduce the number of operations performed by the player. Also, contrary to the release button 800, operation means may be provided in which the storage valve 704a is closed by operating. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to allow each player to select a game characteristic that matches his or her taste.

  In this modification, when a predetermined time (one minute) has passed since the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 is disadvantageous for the player, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to cancel the cancellation. Although the button 800 is configured to be pressed (operated), the method of pressing the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be integrated (in other words, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 May be electrically connected to each other). When it is determined that the ball is detected continuously by the ball entry sensor 704b for a predetermined period (one minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be constituted so that it becomes easy to choose the change classification by which an effect develops. As a result, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set in the open state (release state). In general, since the player observes the result of the fluctuation presentation informing the player whether or not the jackpot is most interesting, when the fluctuation presentation in which the presentation develops by the depression of the frame button 22 is executed, the depression of the frame button 22 is surely The player can be made aware of the prompt. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

  In this modification, the first specified winning opening 65a is provided below the first ball entrance 64 so that the ball enters the first specified winning opening 65a by left hitting, but it is limited to this It is not something that can be done. For example, as in the first embodiment, the first specified winning opening 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, it is possible to flow the ball into the first specified winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 simply by hitting the right in the special game state (big hit state), so the winning balls in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Thus, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided with the storage valves by sliding to the front side and the back side of the front view. While the flow path is closed and the ball can be stored in the upper part, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to close vertically by standing upright on the inner wall portion of the flow path, and in the open state, the storage valve falls in the downstream direction of the flow path. The flow path may be configured to allow passage of balls. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not have to completely close the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704, respectively. For example, when the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes to the front side, the guiding flow path 607 or the guiding flow path 704 is partially opened. It may be configured to be Further, the widths of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball. Thereby, price reduction of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be achieved. Further, when the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704 are set in the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the induction channel 607 and the induction channel 704 may not be completely opened. . That is, the storage valve 607 a and a part of the storage valve 704 a may be in a state in which the storage flow channel 607 and the guidance flow channel 704 protrude. Further, the width of the open portion in the induction flow channel 607 or the induction flow channel 704 may be configured to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thus, in the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the operating range between the open state and the closed state can be narrowed, so that power consumption for switching the state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. Also, if the width of the open part is greater than the diameter of the ball, the inflowing ball may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a and the momentum of the flow may be cut off, but eventually the ball flows down. (It can be made difficult to be stored (held) at the position of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as each of the above embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704, and a state in which the sphere flowing into the induction flow path 607 and the induction flow path 704 flows downstream. .

  In each said embodiment, although each end was made into the out port among each ball socket provided in each storage device, the out port of both ends may be abolished. Even if the out-port is abolished and made into the inner wall, the ball can be made to enter other ball entrances. Also, by eliminating the out-ports at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In the above embodiments, the plurality of out ports are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the out ports provided inside the storage device, the out ports 66 provided below the gaming board 13 in a front view It is good also as a channel which makes a ball flow down to (refer to Drawing 2). As a result, the number of out-ports can be one, so that it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls entering the out-port 66 in order to grasp the number of ejected balls. Therefore, since the number of detection switches for detecting the entering of a ball can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the ball stored in the upper portion of the storage valve is one ball (the first embodiment, a modification of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment), or a two ball (the modification of the second embodiment) However, the invention is not limited thereto, and three or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, in the case of storing a plurality of balls, they may be stored in the longitudinal direction, or may be configured to be able to be stored side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored in the upper part of the storage valve may be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls may be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. . Thereby, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow simultaneously to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, so a large amount (5 × 15) of winning balls are paid out in a short time. Can receive As a result, it is possible to feel that the ball is to be stored inside the storage device 600, so it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is shut off. That is, when the shutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, it is configured to return to the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a when the power is shut off. May be As a result, it is possible to cause the ball to enter the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is shut off, and to suppress the injustice in which the winning ball is immediately obtained upon power recovery.

  In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry port (prize port) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guide channel in which the ball has flowed down (ie, the arrangement of each ball entry port Was fixed), but it is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be configured to be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a well-known clune or the like may be disposed on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning hole (ball inlet) may be provided annularly on the clune. And, by rotating the clune, randomness may be given to the winning opening (ball entrance) into which the balls having flowed down each induction channel flow. In this way, it is possible to make the player watch interestingly for the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the above embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible. However, the inside of the storage device may be configured to be less visible from the front.

  In the above embodiments, the opening and closing of the storage valve are controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to execute the selection processing of the variation effect, the lottery processing of the special symbol and the like which are the main processing regarding the game without delay.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball enters the ball entry opening (winning opening), the number of winning balls according to the type of the ball entering opening (winning opening) is paid out. Not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine to which a prize ball is not given as a game value such as an enclosed type pachinko machine, and, for example, a prepaid card used for gaming according to the type of ball entry port (prize port) It may be configured to increase the balance.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (provide a winning ball to the ball entering the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls can flow down, and a ball entry means provided at a position in which the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path can enter Specific benefit giving means for giving a specific benefit which is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and The game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state A flow path distribution unit that can be changed to a distribution state, and a setting unit that can set the state of the flow path distribution unit to at least the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to the game state. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow channel is branched into the first flow channel and the second flow channel. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The specific benefit which is advantageous to the player in comparison with the above is given by the predetermined benefit giving means. The first distribution state in which the game balls having flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is varied by the setting means into at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, the game ball flows into the specific flow path, whereby a specific benefit is easily provided, and the game set to the second distribution state In the state, it becomes difficult to be granted a specific benefit. Therefore, even if the player strikes the game ball toward the specific flow path, since the benefits provided can be made different according to the game state, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine A1, a predetermined ball entering means provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter and a predetermined number based on the gaming ball entering the normal ball entering means. A gaming machine A2 comprising: game value giving means for giving a game value, wherein the specific benefit giving means gives a game value more than the predetermined game value as the specific benefit.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined game value giving means is provided based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A gaming value is given. The specified benefit giving means gives a game value more than a predetermined game value as a specified benefit.

  Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the gaming state set in the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. As a result, since the game value to be provided can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game advantageous for the player based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result The game state setting means for setting the state is provided, and the setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means. A game machine A3 characterized by being set to.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.

  Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, in addition to becoming advantageous to the player by the bonus gaming state, more gaming value is awarded by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path It becomes easy to be done. Thus, the bonus game state can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be improved.

  In game machine A3, variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first ball entry state where game balls can enter the ball and a second ball entry state where game balls are less likely to enter the ball compared to the first ball entry state And specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable entering means, and based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means. A game machine A4 comprising: variable control means for changing the variable entering means into the first entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable ball entry means is varied between the first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and the second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first ball entering state. A specific game value is awarded by the specific value awarding means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means into the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, since the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, it is possible to obtain a specific game value by striking the ball and striking out the ball. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since the player can be made to obtain more game value, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming value giving unit is for giving a predetermined amount of gaming media as the predetermined gaming value when the game ball enters the normal ball entry unit, A game machine A5 characterized in that the specified benefit giving means gives an amount of game medium larger than the predetermined amount as the specified benefit when a game ball enters the ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means by the game value giving means, a predetermined amount of game media is given as the predetermined game value. When the game ball enters the ball entry means, the specified bonus giving means gives a game medium of an amount larger than a predetermined amount as a specific benefit.

  As a result, the player can be made to play a game by the provided game medium, so it is possible to play the game for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means is configured to set the variable ball entering means from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. The game state setting means sets the game state different from the bonus game state based on the variable game means being changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A game machine A6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is varied by the variable control means from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state a predetermined number of times. A game state different from the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means based on the variable control means changing the variable entering means a predetermined number of times.

  As a result, since the player is given a predetermined number of times an opportunity to enter the ball into the variable entry means in one bonus game state, it is possible to make the player obtain more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  A gaming machine A7 according to any one of gaming machines A4 to A6, characterized in that the specific value imparting means imparts a specific amount of gaming media as the specific gaming value.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the particular value giving means grants a particular amount of gaming media as a particular gaming value, so the player can receive the gaming media. Can play a game. As a result, the player can play the game for a longer time, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the game machine is provided with a guiding channel capable of guiding the gaming ball to the specific channel, and the variable ball entering means is the specific flow among the gaming balls flowing into the guiding channel. A game machine A8 characterized in that a game ball which has not flowed into the road is provided at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming ball is guided to the specific flow path by the induction flow path, and to the specific flow path among the gaming balls flowing into the induction flow path Since the variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that did not flow can enter, the player can launch the game ball into the guiding channel in the bonus game state, and the specific channel and the variable ball entering The ball can flow into the means. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since a specific bonus and a specific game value can be obtained, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be further increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to any one of A4 to A8, further comprising: counting means for counting the number of gaming balls having entered the variable entering means, the variable control means having at least a predetermined number counted by the counting means. The variable ball entering means is variably set to the second ball entering state based on the fact that the gaming state setting means is configured to execute the bonus game by establishing a specific condition in the bonus game state. The game state different from the state is set, and the setting means sets the flow path distribution means at least for a predetermined period from when the bonus game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is set to 1 distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of gaming balls having entered the variable entering means is counted by the counting means. At least based on the fact that the number counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined number, the variable ball entering means is changed into the second ball entering state by the variable control means. When the specific condition is satisfied in the bonus game state, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the bonus game state. The flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means in at least a predetermined period from when the bonus game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thus, the opportunity for the player to acquire a specific gaming value can be limited to a predetermined number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game to be performed during the bonus game state in hopes that more gaming balls will flow into the specific flow path before the predetermined number is reached and the specific benefit is given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the bonus game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A9, ball entering detection means for detecting that the game ball has entered the ball in the normal ball entering means, and the ball entering means in the bonus game state by the ball entry detecting means A game machine A10, comprising: notification means for executing a predetermined notification when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, it is detected by the entering detection means that the game ball has entered the normal entering means, and the entering game means detects the bonus game When it is detected that the gaming ball has entered the normal ball entering means during the state, the predetermined notification is executed by the notifying means, so the flow path distributing means is in spite of being set to the bonus game state When a failure not to be set to the first distribution state occurs, the failure can be recognized for the player or the clerk of the hall by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to solve the problem promptly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow than the second flow path, The flow path distribution unit opens the first flow path in the first distribution state, and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first distribution state. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming ball having flowed into the specific channel is provided at a position where it is easy to be guided in a state where the channel is closed.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where gaming balls which have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened in the first distribution state by the flow path distribution unit, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided in a state where the first flow path is closed.

  Thus, it is possible to change the flow path in which the gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path flow down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously hit toward a specific flow path, a specific benefit is given or not given, so that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, when the first flow channel is closed in the second distribution state, the flow channel distribution unit can hold the game balls to a predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closing position. In the state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the second flow path is in contact with the held game balls and the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. A game machine A12 characterized in that the game machine A12 is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in based on the flow direction changing.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the game ball is held to the predetermined upper limit number on the upstream side of the closing position by the flow path distribution means. In a state where a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls are held on the first flow path, the held gaming balls and the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path come into contact with each other to change the flow-down direction. The second flow path is provided at a position where it is easy to flow in.

  As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, a specific benefit is given or not given, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a display means for displaying an image, and a display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means. A game machine A13 to feature.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means so that an image according to the state of the flow path distribution means is displayed. The player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distribution unit.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means causes the game ball to flow into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. A game machine A14 characterized by displaying an image indicating that a benefit is easily given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the specification is made when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting of the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state by the setting means. The display control means displays an image indicating that it is easy to give the privilege of As a result, even if the player is a beginner, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand the merit when the game ball flows into the specific flow channel.

<Feature B group> (switch the flow path of another ball by the ball held by the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls can flow down, and a gaming ball which flows down the first flow path is provided at a position where it can enter First entering means, first applying means for applying a first gaming value based on the game ball entering the first entering means, and the game flowing down the second flow path A second entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter and the first game provided by the first applying means based on the game ball entering the second entering means. A second giving means for giving a second gaming value different from the value, a first position where the at least one gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and the first A variable that can be changed to a second position where the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path compared to the position is less likely to be held on the first flow path And a switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the variable means holding the gaming ball to hold the game A game machine B1 characterized in that the game ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the ball.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow channel is branched into a plurality of flow channels including at least the first flow channel and the second flow channel. The first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the first ball giving means performs the first by the first applying means based on the ball entering the first ball entering means Game value is awarded. In addition, the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the first ball giving means is based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Second game value different from the first game value to be provided is provided by the second giving means. A first position at which at least one gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and a gaming ball having flowed into the first flow path compared to the first position is on the first flow path The variable means is changed to the second position which is difficult to hold in the second position. The changing means is switched by the switching means from the first position to the second position based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Here, when the gaming ball is held by the variable means, the gaming ball is easily guided to the second flow path by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the ball entering means into which the game ball which has flowed into the specific flow path enters according to whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Can be different. Therefore, the gaming value acquired by the player can be varied between the first gaming value and the second gaming value according to whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the first gaming value awarded by the first awarding means is greater in gaming value than the second gaming value awarded by the second awarding means. A game machine B2 to be

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first gaming value to be awarded by the first granting means is configured to have more gaming value than the second gaming value to be granted by the second granting means, It can be made to feel that the game ball is to be flowed into the specific flow channel in the state where the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions and the bonus game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result A variable entering ball that can be changed into a game state setting means, a first entering state in which the game ball can enter, and a second entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first entering state Based on the means, the specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the fact that the bonus game state is set by the game state setting means And variable control means for changing the variable ball entering means into the first ball entering state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the bonus game state by the game state setting means. Said variable based on Gaming machine B3, characterized in that the stage from the first position in which switching to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to A variable ball entry means is varied between a first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter compared to the first ball entering state, and the variable ball entering A specific gaming value is awarded by the special value awarding means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is changed into the first ball entering state until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable control means.

  Thus, in addition to the player being able to acquire a specific gaming value by the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the bonus game state, the game ball enters the first ball entry means The player can earn the first gaming value. As a result, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be increased, so that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine B3 includes a guiding channel capable of guiding the gaming ball to the specific channel, and the variable ball entry means is a gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding channel without flowing into the specific channel. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is provided at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming ball is guided to the specific flow channel by the induction flow channel. A variable ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball which has flowed down the induction channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter the ball.

  As a result, the player can flow the ball into the specific flow passage and the variable ball entry means only by striking the gaming ball into the guiding flow passage in the bonus game state. Therefore, in the bonus game state, since the first game value and the specific game value can be obtained, the merit of the player in the bonus game state can be further increased. Accordingly, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be further enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and the position where the gaming ball flowing down the third flow path can enter A third game entry means different from the second game value provided by the second application means based on the provided third ball entry means and the game ball entering the third ball entry means. And third variable imparting means for imparting a game value, wherein the variable means holds the game ball and thereby holds the game ball in the second flow path and the third flow path by the holding game ball. A game machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. A third flow path is provided as one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. The third ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the third flow path can enter the ball. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means, the third game value is awarded by the third game value different from the second game value awarded by the second game means. By holding the gaming ball by the variable means, the gaming ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, when the gaming ball is held by the variable means, the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path can enter any of the second entering means and the third entering means. Become. That is, since the player can obtain one of the second game value and the third game value having mutually different game values, the game value obtained by the player can have randomness. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first giving means is provided with the first game value by the game ball having flowed into the specific flow passage entering the first ball entering means. Therefore, the gaming value acquired by the player can be stabilized. Therefore, different game characteristics can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the third gaming value awarded by the third awarding means is greater in gaming value than the first gaming value awarded by the first awarding means. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value provided by the third providing means has more gaming value than the first gaming value provided by the first providing means. Since the game ball is held by the variable means, it is possible to expect the game ball to flow down the third flow path. Therefore, since the player can be made to observe the advancing direction of the game ball having flowed into the specific flow path more interestingly to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the gaming ball on the first flow path, at least the gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path as the arrangement of the gaming ball to be held is the second It is characterized in that it can be held by a first arrangement which is easily guided to the flow passage and a second arrangement which is easily guided to the third flow passage as compared with the first arrangement. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the gaming ball is held on the first flow path by the variable means, the gaming ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path as the arrangement of the held gaming ball is easily guided to the second flow path It is held by the arrangement of 1 and the second arrangement which is more likely to be guided to the third channel as compared to its first arrangement.

  As a result, there is an effect that the player can determine the flow path where the game balls are likely to flow in only by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a determination means for determining whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and an effect for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means A game machine B8 comprising: an execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is judged by the judging means whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and a specific effect indicating the judgment result by the judging means is executed by the effect executing means The effect is that the player can more easily determine the flow path in which the game ball is likely to flow.

  One of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is characterized in that it comprises adjustment means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow channel into the second flow channel and the 3 flow channels. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio at which the gaming balls having flowed into the specific flow path flow into the second flow path and the third flow path is adjusted by the adjusting means Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make the gaming machine to which the second benefit is easily given or the gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given by the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specification of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the sales policy of each hall.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the game machine comprises operation means operable by the player and detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and the switching means operates the operation means by the detection means. A game machine B10 characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on being detected.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the following effects are exerted. That is, the operation on the operation means is detected by the detection means. The changing means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on detection of an operation on the operation means by the detection means.

  In this way, it is possible to switch whether or not to allow the player to cause the game ball having flowed down to the specific flow channel to flow down to the first ball entry means, so that each player is fit for his / her taste There is an effect that it can be set to the state.

  One of game machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one game ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one game ball is held by the variable means on the first flow path, so that the variable means is changed to the first position When the player quits playing the game, the game ball remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost when leaving the game.

<Feature C group> (The probability change ratio can be changed by adjusting the ratio of the ball entering the storage device)
A first flow passage which is branched into at least a first flow passage where the game ball can flow down and a second flow passage, and a first ball entry where the game ball which has flowed down the first flow passage is provided at a position where it can enter Means and first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit based on the game ball entering the first entering means, and the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path A second benefit different from the first benefit is provided based on the second ball entering means provided at the ball entry enable position and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second benefit granting means that can be used, and an adjustment means that can adjust the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down the specific flow path to the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively; A game machine C1 comprising:

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is to be won based on winning in a specific winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of prize balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-129177.

  However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player plays a game in the same type of game machine, the ball keeps winning in the same winning opening as long as the ball is launched in the same direction, and the number of balls to be paid out is also scarcely changed There was a case. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can flow. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first benefit giving means One benefit is awarded. The second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, different from the first benefit The second benefit is awarded by the second benefit awarding means. The ratio in which the game ball which has flowed down the specific flow channel flows into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means is adjusted by the adjusting means.

  Thus, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine to which the first benefit is easily given or the gaming machine to which the second benefit is easy to be imparted. Therefore, even with the same model, different game characteristics can be realized by changing the degree of adjustment by the adjustment means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result In a first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the specific lottery result is high, and in a second lottery state in which the probability of the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state And a lottery condition setting unit that can be set, wherein the first benefit giving unit controls the first lottery condition to be set by the lottery condition setting unit as the first benefit. A gaming machine C2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the gaming result when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result A bonus game advantageous to the person is awarded by the bonus game awarding means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a specific lottery result is high and the second lottery state in which the probability that a particular lottery result is more than the first lottery state is low . It is controlled by the first benefit granting means so that the first lottery state is set by the lottery state setting means as the first benefit.

  Thereby, the ease of transition to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjustment means. Therefore, the first lottery state is easily set according to the sales policy of the hall, and it is difficult to set the first lottery state so as to be a game characteristic that easily becomes the bonus game state, and the game characteristic that the second benefit is easily given Can be adjusted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a versatile game machine which can be adapted to the sales policy of each hole.

  In the game machine C1 or C2, a game machine C3 characterized in that the second benefit awarding means grants a predetermined amount of game media as the second benefit.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined amount of gaming medium is provided as the second benefit by the second benefit giving means, and therefore, the easiness of provision of the predetermined amount of gaming medium Can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to adjust whether to make the game characteristic in which the predetermined amount of game media is easily given or the game characteristic in which the first benefit is easily given according to the sales policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a versatile game machine which can be adapted to the sales policy of each hole.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the ball compared to the first position Variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is established based on the fact that the bonus game is given by the bonus game giving means; , A game machine C4 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable means changes the first position where the game ball can enter the ball into the first ball entry means, and the second position where the game ball can not easily enter the ball compared to the first position. Be done. Based on the fact that the bonus game is awarded by the bonus game awarding means, the variable control means varies the variable means to the first position until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, since the first benefit is easily provided in the benefit game state, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the benefit game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position based on the passage of a predetermined time after at least the variable means is changed to the first position. A game machine C5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the variable control unit is moved to the second position by the variable control unit based on the passage of a predetermined time after the variable unit is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the player to acquire the first benefit until the predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first benefit can be increased, the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine to play a game, it is possible to select the gaming machine in consideration of the degree of adjustment of the adjusting means, so that it is possible to give fun to select the gaming machine. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific entering means to which a specific gaming value is awarded based on the entering of the gaming ball, and a specific entering value based on the entering of the gaming ball. And the second flow path is a specific flow path for causing the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means, and the second flow path to the low value ball entry means. In a first variable position, which is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and in which at least one gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow path can be held on the specific flow path, and in the first variable position A game machine C6, comprising position variable means capable of changing the game ball having flowed into the specific flow path to a second variable position which is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific gaming value is awarded based on the game ball entering the specific entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value entering means Less game value than a specific game value is awarded based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path for flowing the gaming ball to the specific ball entry means and a low-value flow path for flowing to the low-value ball entry means. The first variable position capable of holding at least one gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow channel on the specific flow channel, and the gaming ball having flowed into the specific flow channel compared to the first variable position is retained on the specific flow channel The position variable means is changed to the second variable position which is difficult to be done.

  Thereby, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the ball entering means is such that the game ball flowed into the second flow path enters the ball according to the variable position of the position variable means. It can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  The gaming machine C6 includes holding control means for controlling the position variable means to change to the second variable position based on the fact that the bonus game is given by the bonus game giving means, and the specific channel Is located at a position where gaming balls having flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow in than the low-value flow path, and the position changing means holds the gaming balls by holding the game balls. A game machine C7 characterized in that the game ball is easily guided to the low-value flow path by the game ball being played.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the fact that the bonus game is awarded by the bonus game awarding means, the position variable means is varied to the second variable position by the holding control means. The specific flow channel is disposed at a position where the gaming balls having flowed into the second flow channel are more likely to flow in than the low-value flow channel. By holding the gaming ball by the position variable means, the gaming ball is guided to the low-value channel by the held gaming ball.

  Thereby, according to whether the variable position of the position variable means and the game ball are held by the position variable means, it is possible to make the ball entry means into which the game ball which has flowed into the second flow path enter the ball different. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be varied according to the variable position of the position variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that a game becomes monotonous.

  A game machine C9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position variable means are constituted by one member, so the position and the position variable of the variable means can be controlled by one control. The position of the means can be switched simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjustment means causes the game ball to enter the second ball when the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow channel to the first ball entering means is increased. By reducing the rate of flow into the ball means, and reducing the rate of flow of the game ball into the first ball entry means, increase the rate of flow of the game ball into the second ball entry means A game machine C10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the gaming machine having flowed into the specific flow path increases the ratio of the flow of the gaming ball into the first flow path by the adjusting means The rate at which the balls flow into the second channel is reduced. In addition, when the ratio in which the gaming ball flowing down to the specific flow channel flows into the first flow channel is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio in which the gaming ball flows into the second flow channel is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game balls can be more easily introduced into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, which is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball wins based on a particular winning opening. In addition to the specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided in which the winning balls are paid out by winning the ball. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of award balls to be paid out according to the type of the winning opening, the number of award balls obtainable by the player can be changed according to the direction in which the game balls are ejected. (For example, patent document 1: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2001-129177).
However, since it is common for the winning balls that can be obtained by winning to be larger in amount than the winning balls to be paid out by winning to the winning opening, the player is usually determined whether or not to win. Launch a game ball by aiming at a specific winning opening that will trigger a lottery. In other words, it was common for players to keep hitting the ball in the same direction until they hit the ball. Therefore, when the player strikes the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win in the same winning opening, and the number of balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, there was a possibility that the game would be monotonous.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a game from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a game ball having flowed down the first flow path, and a specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path in which game balls can flow down. Based on the ball entering means provided at the position where the ball can enter and the game ball falling into the ball entering means, compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path Compared with the first distribution state in which specific benefit giving means for giving an advantageous specific benefit, and the first distribution state in which gaming balls flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the first distribution state And a second distribution state in which game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and a state of the channel distribution means at least in the first distribution state according to the game state. And setting means settable in the second distribution state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the normal ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter, and the normal ball entry means The game apparatus further comprises game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the ball, and the specific benefit giving means has a game value more than the predetermined game value as the specific benefit. It is given.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition and the lottery result by the lottery means become a specific lottery result A game state setting means for setting the game state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means. The state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific flow channel is branched into the first flow channel and the second flow channel. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entry means The specific benefit which is advantageous to the player in comparison with the above is given by the predetermined benefit giving means. The first distribution state in which the game balls having flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is varied by the setting means into at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state according to the game state.
Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, the game ball flows into the specific flow path, whereby a specific benefit is easily provided, and the game set to the second distribution state In the state, it becomes difficult to be granted a specific benefit. Therefore, even if the player strikes the game ball toward the specific flow path, since the benefits provided can be made different according to the game state, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the predetermined game value giving means is provided based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. A gaming value is given. The specified benefit giving means gives a game value more than a predetermined game value as a specified benefit.
Thus, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution unit is set to the first distribution state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, compared to the gaming state set in the second distribution state. It becomes easy to acquire value. As a result, since the game value to be provided can be made different depending on the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result, the bonus gaming state advantageous to the player by the gaming state setting means Set to Based on the setting of the bonus game state by the game state setting means, the state of the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state by the setting means.
Thereby, when the gaming state is set to the bonus gaming state, in addition to becoming advantageous to the player by the bonus gaming state, more gaming value is awarded by the game ball flowing into the specific flow path It becomes easy to be done. Thus, the bonus game state can be made more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the bonus game state can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a first specified winning combination (variable entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 launch control device (launch means)
113 voice lamp control device (display control means)
601 General prize winning opening ( second ball entry means)
602 General Prize Win ( First Entry Means)
606 induction channel (second channel)
607 Induction channel (first channel)
607a Storage valve ( variable means)
650a second specified winning combination (variable entry means)
701 General Prize Win ( First Entry Means)
702 General prize winning opening (entry means)
703d General prize winning opening (second ball entry means)
704 Induction channel (first channel)
704a Storage valve ( variable means)
708 induction channel (second channel)
S218 variable game execution means S305 determination means S1103 setting means
S1106 variable control means S1302 setting means
S1944 counting means S4003, S4007 setting means

Claims (3)

A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls can flow down;
A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the first flow passage can enter the ball;
Specific benefit giving means for giving a specific benefit which is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means;
The game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state in which the game balls having flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the first distribution state 2) Flow path distribution means that can be changed to 2 distribution states;
A game machine comprising setting means capable of setting the state of the flow path distribution means at least in the first distribution state and the second distribution state in accordance with a game state. A normal ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball;
The game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means, and
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific benefit awarding means imparts a game value greater than the predetermined game value as the specific benefit. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions;
And game state setting means for setting the game state to a bonus game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result.
The setting means sets the state of the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state based on the fact that the bonus game state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

Images